JP2019205503A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a performance effect.SOLUTION: A game machine in which a game can be played includes: a first movable body that is operatively provided; a second movable body that is operatively provided at a position different from the first movable body; and display means. The display means can display a first character and a second character, displays the first character when the first movable body is operated, displays the second character when the second movable body is operated, and displays the first character and the second character when the first movable body and the second movable body are operated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-12

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing games.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine that can operate an accessory that is a decorative body and displays an effect image corresponding to the operation of the accessory on a liquid crystal display device (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-92893

  However, Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is not possible to enhance the production effect.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A first movable body (eg, movable body 042SG302L) provided so as to be operable;
A second movable body (eg, movable body 042SG302R) provided to be operable at a position different from the first movable body;
Display means (for example, image display device 5);
With
The display means includes
A first character (for example, image 042SG5x shown in FIG. 11-12) and a second character (for example, image 042SG5y shown in FIG. 11-12) can be displayed.
The first character is displayed when the first movable body is operated (for example, when only the movable body 042SG302L moves toward the effect position as shown in FIG. Part where image 042SG5x is displayed),
When the second movable body is operated, the second character is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12, when only the movable body 042SG302R moves toward the effect position, the second character is displayed on the image display device 5. Part where image 042SG5y is displayed),
When the first movable body and the second movable body are operated, the first character and the second character are displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the movable body 042SG302L and the movable body 042SG302R). Is moved toward the effect position, the image display device 5 displays the image 042SG5x and the image 042SG5y)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the production effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the specific display result being derived and displayed,
The display means includes
It is possible to display an emphasis display that emphasizes that the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 12, the emphasis display of decorative symbols is executed a plurality of times in the image display device 5. portion),
The highlighted display can be displayed in different manners when the first movable body is operated and when the second movable body is operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the movable body 042SG302L). And the case where only the movable body 042SG302R moves toward the effect position, and the image display device 5 executes the emphasis display of the decorative pattern a plurality of times).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the production effect for being controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or means 2,
The first movable body and the second movable body include a third movable body (for example, a movable body 042SG401) that can operate independently.
The third movable body operates after the first movable body and the second movable body operate (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the movable body 042SG302L and the movable body 042SG302R move to the effect position). Part where movable body 042SG401 falls after
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the effect of the third movable body.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 3,
The first movable body and the second movable body are:
It is movable between a first position (for example, a standby position on the left and right sides of the image display device 5) and a second position (for example, an effect position in front of the image display device 5),
The first movable body moves to a third position between the first position and the second position when the first character is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12). As described above, the movable body 042SG302L moves to a ready position between the standby position and the effect position and stops once when the image 042SG5x is displayed on the image display device 5).
The second movable body moves to the third position when the second character is displayed on the display means (for example, the movable body 042SG302R is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-12). When 042SG5y is displayed, it moves to the preparation position between the stand-by position and the effect position and temporarily stops)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the first movable body and the second movable body can be preferably moved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 4,
Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A and push button 31B) capable of detecting the player's movement;
The first movable body and the second movable body are connected to each other based on detection of the player's movement over a predetermined period by the detection means during an effective period (for example, an operation reception period of the push button 31B). Specific effect execution means (for example, an effect in the feature portion 177SG) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, the movable body effect shown in FIGS. 10-30 and 10-31 in the feature portion 177SG) operated in conjunction with the player's action. The control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG.
With
The specific effect executing means is
When the player's movement is detected by the detection means in the first situation, the first movable body and the second movable body are operated in the first movement mode (for example, the characteristic portion As shown in FIG. 11-28 of 177SG, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. The movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is operated at high speed and low torque)
When the player's movement is detected by the detection means in a second situation different from the first situation, the first movable body and the second movable body are changed to the second movement mode. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-28 of the characteristic part 177SG, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not arranged at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are operated. In the torque priority mode to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at a low speed).
According to this feature, the production effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 5,
A predetermined state (for example, a state where a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is being executed or an error is detected. A predetermined gaming state (low probability low base state (normal state), low probability high base state ( (Short-time state), high-probability low base state (latent state), high-probability high base state (probability change state)), or a state controlled to a specific performance mode)) For example, a part of the effect control CPU 120 that controls to execute the super reach effect by executing step S172, or a part that detects an error in the game control microcomputer 100. A part of the microcomputer 100 that controls to a predetermined gaming state and a part that controls to a predetermined effect mode in the CPU 120 for effect control. And a there may be) a part that executes a predetermined effect,
Special effect execution means that can execute a special effect (for example, a super reach effect) (for example, a portion that executes the super reach effect by performing step S172 in the CPU 120 for effect control),
A display control means (for example, a step of performing the first telop effect by performing step S172 in the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a related display (for example, telop display) related to the predetermined state on the display means; A portion that performs the second telop effect when receiving a command indicating that an error has been detected in S75),
The display control means includes
During the execution of the special effect, the related display can be displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, a first stage in which characters move at a medium speed) accompanied by an action,
In accordance with a change in the mode of the special effect, the related display mode is changed from the predetermined mode to the special mode having a different operation speed (for example, the second stage in which the character moves at a high speed, the character moves at a low speed) For example, the production control CPU 120 executes step S172, so that the first half of the super reach production (before the cut-in display) is performed at the first stage. 1 telop display 115IW10 is performed, the first telop display 115IW10 is performed at the second stage in the second half of the super reach production (after the cut-in display is performed), and the first telop display 115IW10 is performed at the third stage immediately before the change stop. (Refer to FIG. 8-1 of the characteristic part 38SG))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the production effect can be improved.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with which characteristic part 115IW is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with which characteristic part 115IW is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with which characteristic part 115IW is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with which characteristic part 115IW is provided. It is a figure which shows the structure of an image display apparatus, the display state in an image display apparatus, and the visual recognition state of the stereo image by a player's both eyes. (A)-(H) are figures which show the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a movable body effect. (A) (B) is a figure which shows the detail of the example operation | movement effect of a 1st movable body effect, (C) is a figure which shows the example of an image display. It is a figure which shows a modification. It is a front view of the gaming machine according to the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the game machine which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A) is a front view showing a state in which the movable body of the effect device according to the characteristic part of 177SG is in the first position, (B) is a front view showing a state in which the movable body of the effect device according to the characteristic part of 177SG is in the second position. It is. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the production | presentation apparatus which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the production | presentation apparatus which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG from diagonally back. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the movable body which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG from diagonally forward. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the movable body which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG from diagonally back. (A) is the schematic which shows the state which has the rotation part which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG in a 1st protrusion position, (B) has the rotation part which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG in an accommodation position. It is principal part fracture | rupture sectional drawing which shows the structure of the lower part of the movable body which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the 1st drive mechanism which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, (B) is a top view which shows the to-be-guided member which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a top view which shows the relationship between the guide groove which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, a to-be-guided member, and a moving body. (A)-(E) are figures which show the operation | movement aspect of the to-be-guided member which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, and a movable part. (F)-(J) is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of the to-be-guided member which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, and a movable part. (A)-(C) are schematic explanatory drawings which show the relationship between the movable body which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, and an image display apparatus. (A) is a state in which the movable body according to the characteristic part of 177SG is in the lowered position, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the movable body is in the raised position according to the characteristic part of 177SG. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the presentation control command which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a figure which illustrates the variation pattern which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot classification determination table which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, (B) is a figure which shows the content of the various jackpots which concern on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the non-detection operation control which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, the detection operation control, and the operation control for real operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the operation speed in the operation | movement of non-detection operation control which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, operation control at the time of detection, and operation control for real operation confirmation, and an accessory motor drive mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production | presentation actor operation | movement process which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stage effect storage process which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is explanatory drawing explaining the accessory motor drive mode which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the super reach classification which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, button control, and an accessory motor drive mode. (A), (B) is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the button operation which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG, and a accessory motor. (A)-(F) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation | movement aspect of the movable body in the super reach C which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. (A)-(F) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the operation | movement aspect of the movable body in the super reach D which concerns on the characteristic part of 177SG. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic part 042SG. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. (A) is the schematic which shows the stand-by position of each movable body, (B) is the schematic which shows the production position of each movable body. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st effect device, a 2nd effect device, and a 3rd effect device. It is sectional drawing of a 1st effect device, a 2nd effect device, and a 3rd effect device. It is a front view of the 2nd production device. It is a rear view which shows operation | movement of the movable body in a 3rd production apparatus. It is a rear view which shows operation | movement of the movable body in a 3rd production apparatus. (A) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command, (B) is a related figure of the effect performed during each reach effect, (C) is an explanatory view of an interlocking effect and a union effect. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect of an interlocking production. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect of a unification effect. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation aspect of alerting | reporting effect.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. Special symbols are represented by numbers indicating “0” to “9”, lighting patterns such as “−”, and the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative design described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scroll-displayed or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating “0” to “9”, lighting patterns such as “−”, and the like. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol deviating symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “unusual symbol”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball apparatus 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed, or a period in which it is controlled to a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state (described later) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (out-of-order symbol, for example, “-”) is stopped and displayed, it becomes “out of”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state and the certainty change state continue until one of the end conditions is satisfied first, such as a specific number of special game runs and the next big hit game state being started. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy-low base state, and so on. The high-accuracy state and the low base state are also called high-accuracy low base states.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that are not yet stopped when the decorative symbols that are stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described below. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “out of place”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ May be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach out”). In addition, when the display result is “missing”, after the decorative display variable display mode is changed to the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination (“reach off” is displayed as the variable display display pattern of the decorative design. ”) May be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ reach off ”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), and a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of restoration of power interruption, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, as well as the status of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of ordinary symbols on display is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the off symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. Further, when the display result is “out of”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “off”, the game state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit pre-release processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit ending process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing is ended.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal is generated, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold storage number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special chart waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is to be started. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. In addition, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command designating to start the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, it is determined that the display result in the special game is “out of place”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device or the like in advance It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding feature 115IW)
Next, the characteristic part 115IW of this Embodiment is demonstrated. The pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the feature unit 115IW is a gaming machine that can execute a game, can be controlled to a predetermined state, can execute a special effect, and displays a related display related to the predetermined state on the display means. Is possible. In addition, during execution of the special effect, it is possible to display the related display in a predetermined mode with an action, and the special display linked with the mode of the special effect from the predetermined mode according to the change of the mode of the special effect It can be changed to a mode (a special mode having a different operation speed from the predetermined mode).

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the feature unit 115IW can execute a telop effect that displays a telop on the image display device 5 as a related display. As the telop effect, the first telop effect that displays the first telop display related to the effect state (specifically, the character that suggests that the super reach is in progress) and the second telop display related to the game state (specifically In addition, a second telop effect for displaying a character indicating that an error has been detected is provided.

  In the first telop effect, the characters in the first telop display are moved and displayed, while in the second telop effect, the characters in the second telop display are fixedly displayed.

  In addition, as a stage of the character moving speed in the first telop effect, a first stage in which the character moves at a medium speed, a second stage in which the character moves at a high speed, and a third stage in which the character moves at a low speed are provided. It has been. Specifically, when the first telop effect is performed, the first telop display is displayed in the first stage in the first half of the super reach effect, and the first telop display is displayed in the second stage in the second half of the super reach effect. The first telop display is displayed in the third stage immediately before the change is stopped. As described above, during the execution of the super reach effect, the moving speed of the characters in the first telop display is switched stepwise from medium speed → high speed → low speed.

  FIGS. 8-1 to 8-4 are explanatory diagrams illustrating display examples in the pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the feature unit 115IW.

  In the display example shown in FIG. 8A, the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variation pattern that becomes a big hit by developing to super reach in step S111, and the production control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern in step S172. This is realized by performing a variable production.

  For example, first, when the variation is performed and the same symbol is stopped and displayed as the left and right symbols of the decorative symbol, the image is developed to reach (see FIG. 8-1 (1)), and when it is developed to super reach, the image display device 5 The first telop display 115IW10 indicating that the super reach is being performed is displayed on the lower left and upper right of the screen (see FIG. 8-1 (2)). At this time, characters move from the upper left to the lower right in the first telop display 115IW10 displayed at the lower left of the image display device 5, while the lower right in the first telop display 115IW10 displayed at the upper right of the image display device 5. The character is displayed to move from left to top left. The character moving speed in the first telop display 115IW10 at this time is the first stage. Further, the first telop display 115IW10 displayed at the lower left of the image display device 5 displays characters larger than the first telop display 115IW10 displayed at the upper right of the image display device 5, whereby the image display device. The first telop display 115IW10 displayed at the lower left of 5 is visible on the near side (player side) than the first telop display 115IW10 displayed at the upper right of the image display device 5.

  In FIG. 8A, two first telop displays 115IW10 are displayed. However, a single first telop display 115IW10 or three or more first telop displays 115IW10 may be displayed.

  When displaying a plurality of first telop displays 115IW10, the display mode such as the size of the character and the display range, the moving direction and the moving speed of the character may be unified, It may be different. Also, the contents of the characters may be the same or different. For example, one telop display may display “SP Reaching!”, And the other telop display may display “SP Reach wins if a teammate wins !?”. Further, the reliability for the big hit may differ depending on the display mode of the telop and the content of the characters.

  Next, cut-in display is performed at a predetermined timing during super reach (see FIG. 8-1 (3)), and the first telop display 115IW10 is once erased. When the cut-in display ends, the display corresponding to the super reach and the first telop display 115IW10 are again performed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 8-1 (4)). At this time, the character moving speed in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched to the second stage. As described above, in this example, the character moving speed in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched when the cut-in display is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the moving speed of the characters may be switched from the first stage to the second stage without interrupting the display of the first telop display 115IW10.

  Then, at the stage of reaching the final stage of the super reach, the display in the super reach production (the display in which the sword and the ax collide) is displayed in slow motion (or stopped display), and the moving speed of the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is Switch to the third stage (see FIG. 8-1 (5)). Note that the first telop display 115IW10 may be displayed at a slower speed than the second stage. For example, the first telop display 115IW10 may be displayed in the first stage.

  Finally, the super reach effect is terminated and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 8-1 (6)). Here, an example of a big hit is shown, but there is a possibility that the display shown in FIG. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (5), after the display in the super reach effect is displayed in slow motion and the character moving speed in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched to the third stage, the super reach effect is further displayed. The characters in the display and the first telop display 115IW10 may be stopped and displayed to notify whether or not the game is a big hit based on a predetermined action (for example, push of the push button 31B) by the player.

  In the first telop display 115IW10, characters are displayed on a non-transparent background, but the background may be transparent.

  Also, in this feature 115IW, the mode (character moving speed) in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched corresponding to the display of the super reach effect, but the first telop display corresponding to the effect other than the super reach effect. The mode (character moving speed) in 115IW10 may be switched. For example, the mode (character moving speed) in the first telop display 115IW10 may be switched in response to an effect using an effect member other than the image display device 5 such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the movable body 32. Specifically, the mode (character moving speed) in the first telop display 115IW10 may be switched corresponding to the tempo or volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the first telop display 115IW10 may change from the retreat position. If the movable body 32 that can move to the first advanced position and the second advanced position is provided, the moving speed of the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 based on the movable body 32 being located at the retracted position. Is set to the first stage, the character moving speed in the first telop display 115IW10 is switched to the second stage based on the movement to the first advance position, and the first telop is based on the movement to the second advance position. The moving speed of characters on the display 115IW10 may be switched to the third stage.

  In the display example shown in FIG. 8B, the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variation pattern that becomes a big hit by developing to super reach in step S111, and the production control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern in step S172. This is realized by performing a second telop effect when the CPU 120 for effect control receives a command indicating that an error has been detected in step S75. Detailed description of portions similar to those in FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-2 (2), (4), and (5), the first telop display 115IW10 changes the character speed in accordance with the change in the development mode of the super reach production. The 2-telop display 115IW20 is fixedly displayed without being affected by the change in the development mode of the super reach production.

  It should be noted that here, abnormal winning (the count switch 23 is turned on even though the big winning opening is closed, and the second start opening switch 22B is turned on even though the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is closed). Error) such as detection of abnormal electromagnetics, opening of the door provided in the game frame, or the hitting plate (upper plate) being full. .

  Further, in FIG. 8B, the second telop display 115IW20 is continuously displayed from the start to the end of the change, but a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display, Alternatively, the second telop display 115IW20 is erased based on detecting a specific operation while the second telop display 115IW20 is being displayed.

  In the second telop display 115IW20, characters are displayed on a non-transparent background, but the background may be transparent.

  The display example illustrated in FIG. 8C is realized by performing an image blur effect in which the effect control CPU 120 vibrates a plurality of displays displayed on the image display device 5 in step S172.

  For example, in the super reach, the image blur effect is executed from the state where the first telop display 115IW10 and the second telop display 115IW20 are displayed on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 8-3 (1)). 8-3 (2)). Specifically, a plurality of displays such as the character image and the first telop display 115IW10 are reduced at a common reduction rate. Then, by executing the reduction effect, a black outside display area 115IW30 is formed around the changed display. At this time, the second telop display 115IW20 is not changed from the position shown in FIG. 8-3 (1), and is displayed across the changed display and the outside display area 115IW30. The characters in the second telop display 115IW20 can be recognized.

  Further, the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 are continuously displayed while the image blur effect is being performed. During the execution of the image blur effect, the aspect of the first telop display 115IW10 may change (for example, change from the first level to the second level) according to the progress of the super reach effect, or may be reduced. Therefore, even if the super reach effect develops during the execution of the image blur effect, the aspect of the first telop display 115IW10 may not change.

  Note that the image blur effect is not an effect that is performed with all fluctuations. For example, the fluctuation in which the image blur effect is executed has a higher expectation for the big hit than the change in which the image blur effect is not performed ( In other words, the image blur effect is executed as a chance-up effect). Specifically, the image blur effect is executed at a higher rate in the case of the big hit fluctuation than in the case of the deviation fluctuation.

  In the display example shown in FIG. 8-4 (1), the game ball to the right area of the game board 2 is based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 has received a command indicating that it is in a specific gaming state in step S75. This is realized by displaying a right-handed display 115IW40 that prompts the user to launch (so-called right-handed).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (1), the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed in an area partially overlapping with the display area of the right-handed display 115IW40 by developing into super reach in a specific gaming state. Is displayed. At this time, the display priority of the right-handed display 115IW40 is higher than the display priority of the first telop display 115IW10. However, when the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 are moved and displayed, the first telop display 115IW10 is moved. The player can recognize the suggested contents.

  In the display example shown in FIG. 8-4 (2), in the gaming machine equipped with the movable body 115IW50 that can be operated, the effect control CPU 120 performs a role effect that drives the movable body 115IW50 to the advanced position in step S172. It is realized by doing.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (2), the display of the movable body 115 </ b> IW <b> 50 and the display area of the first telop display 115 </ b> IW <b> 10 overlaps by performing the effect effect during the super reach. At this time, the movable body 115IW50 is closer to the front side (player side) than the first telop display 115IW10. However, by moving and displaying the characters of the first telop display 115IW10, the suggested contents of the first telop display 115IW10 are displayed. The player can recognize.

  The display example shown in FIG. 8-4 (3) is a game machine equipped with the image display device 5 and a sub-image display device 115IW60 different from the image display device 5, and is superposed by the effect control CPU 120 in step S172. This is realized by performing a variation effect according to reach variation.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (3), the first telop display 115IW10 extends over the image display device 9 and the sub-image display device 115IW60 provided adjacent to the right side of the image display device 9. It is displayed. The sub-image display device 115IW60 is composed of, for example, an LCD or an organic EL, and displays various effect images. The sub image display device 115IW60 may be composed of a projector and a screen.

  The sub image display device 115IW60 may be configured to be operable. For example, display is performed at a retreat position that is not in contact with the image display device 9 at normal times, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, selection of a specific variation pattern, detection of a player's action). The first telop display 115IW10 displayed on the image display device 5 may be extended and displayed based on the image display device 9.

  As described above, according to the feature unit 115IW, the gaming machine is capable of executing a game and is in a predetermined state (in this example, a state in which a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is being executed, Predetermined gaming state (low probability low base state (normal state), low probability high base state (short time state), high probability low base state (latent state), high probability high base state (probability change state) )) Or a state controlled to a specific performance mode), a state of detecting an error, or a state controlled to a specific performance mode) (in this example, The effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the super reach effect by executing step S172, and the game control microcomputer 100 detects an error. A special effect (in this example, a super reach effect) or special effect (a super reach effect) may be performed by the microcomputer 100 controlling the game state to a predetermined game state, the effect control CPU 120 controlling to a predetermined effect mode, or executing a predetermined effect. (In this example, the production control CPU 120 executes a super reach production by performing step S172), and displays a related display (telop display in this example) related to a predetermined state by display means (this example). Then, in this example, the display control CPU 120 performs the first telop effect by performing step S172, and receives a command indicating that an error has been detected in step S75. In case 2nd telop effect is performed).

  In this feature 115IW, it is possible to execute a super reach effect as a special effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a notice effect such as a character notice, a group notice, or an effect effect has not yet started. A pre-reading notice effect with a change subject to notice may be executed as a special effect.

  In addition, the “related display related to a predetermined state” includes a display related to being currently controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a display such as “SP reach” or “error occurred”), and a predetermined display in the future. And a display related to the possibility of being controlled by a state (for example, a display such as “in preparation” indicating that a specific performance is scheduled to be executed).

  In addition, as described above, during the execution of the special effect, the related display can be displayed in a predetermined manner accompanied by an action (in this example, the first stage in which characters move at a medium speed). In accordance with the change of the mode, the related display mode is changed from the predetermined mode to the special mode (in this example, the second stage in which the character moves at a high speed and the third stage in which the character moves at a low speed) linked to the special effect mode. (In this example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S172, so that the first telop display is performed at the first stage in the first half of the super reach effect (before the cut-in display is performed). 115IW10 is performed, the first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the second stage in the second half of the super reach production (after the cut-in display is performed), and the first telop display 11 is performed in the third stage immediately before the change is stopped. IW10 perform (see Figure 8-1)) was decided. Thereby, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, as described above, during the execution of the special effect, the related display can be displayed in a predetermined manner accompanied by an action (in this example, the first stage in which characters move at a medium speed). A special mode in which the operation speed of the related display mode is different from the predetermined mode according to the mode change (in this example, the second stage in which the character moves at a high speed, and the third stage in which the character moves at a low speed). (In this example, the production control CPU 120 executes the first telop in the first stage in the first half of the super reach production (before the cut-in display is performed) by executing step S172. Display 115IW10 is performed. In the second half of the super reach production (after cut-in display is performed), the first telop display 115IW10 is performed in the second stage, and the first telop display is performed in the third stage immediately before the change is stopped. The 15IW10 performed (see Figure 8-1)) can be characterized. According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

  This feature 115IW displays the first telop display 115IW10 in the first stage in the first half of the super reach production, in the second stage in the second half of the super reach production, and in the third stage just before the change stop (medium speed → However, the present invention is not limited to this as long as it changes according to the change in the mode of production. For example, it may be switched from low speed → medium speed → high speed, or may be switched from high speed → medium speed → low speed.

  In addition, the aspect of the first telop display 115IW10 may be switched only once, or may be switched three or more times. Further, the stage of the first telop display 115IW10 may be switched to the same stage a plurality of times such as medium speed → high speed → low speed → high speed.

  In the telop display mode, the character movement speed is constant (medium speed for the first stage, high speed for the second stage, and low speed for the third stage). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, there may be provided a stage in which the character moving speed is increased or decreased every predetermined cycle.

  In addition, the special mode having a different operation speed from the predetermined mode is a concept including a higher speed mode and a lower speed mode than the predetermined mode. In addition, the low-speed mode is a concept that includes not only a medium-speed mode and a high-speed mode, but also a fixed display (stopped) and a substantially stopped mode, in addition to those displayed slowly. For example, by switching from the stage where characters in telop display are moved and displayed to the stage where characters are fixedly displayed, or from stage where characters in telop display are fixed and displayed, to the stage where characters are moved and displayed The aspect may be changed.

  In the feature unit 115IW, a telop display in which characters are moved and displayed is displayed as a mode involving an operation. However, a specific example of the operation is not limited to this. For example, characters that do not move but those that display moving effect images surrounding the characters, those that blink characters and effect images, and those that change the size, brightness, color, or transparency of characters and effect images. There may be. Further, the color and transparency of the background portion of the character may be changed.

  Note that the “special mode linked to the mode of special effects” means a mode linked to the progress of the special effects (for example, the first stage in the case of the first half of the reach and the latter half of the reach as in the feature section 115IW). For example, the second stage, or the third stage if it is just before the change is stopped), and a mode (for example, a mode that changes according to the switching frequency of the display image or the tempo of the music) linked to the magnitude of the effect of the special effect. It is a concept.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-1, the character of the first telop display 115IW10 shakes in response to the impact of the sword and the ax colliding, for example, at the end of the super reach production (see FIG. 8-1 (5)). Alternatively, the first telop display 115IW10 may be displayed in a manner linked to the contents of the effect by moving the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 in a direction different from the moving direction.

  Further, at that time, a plurality of types of impacts (for example, impact (large) and impact (small)) where the sword and the ax collide are provided, and the first telop display 115IW10 is provided according to the magnitude of the impact. It is good also as the magnitude | size (for example, character fluctuation width) which influences differ.

  Further, even if the same type of impact is applied, the magnitude of the influence (for example, the character fluctuation width) affected by the first telop display 115IW10 may be different on the basis of whether or not it is a big hit. Thereby, it can be made to pay attention to the 1st telop display 115IW10 more, and an interest can be improved.

  In addition, even when the impact is the same type, the first telop display displayed at the lower left of the image display device 5 and the first telop display displayed at the upper right of the image display device 5 are greatly affected by the impact. It is good also as that (for example, the fluctuation width of a character) differs. For example, in a game machine that displays a large telop display with a large character and a small telop display with a small character in parallel as in the feature section 115IW, an effect is produced in which a sword and an ax collide with a predetermined impact. In this case, if the character sways by the same width in the large telop display and the small telop display, the ratio of the sway width to the character size of the small telop display than the ratio of the sway width to the character size of the large telop display Therefore, it can be considered that the influence on the small telop display appears to be relatively larger than the influence on the large telop display, giving a sense of incongruity. Therefore, when an effect where the sword and the ax collide with each other at a predetermined impact is performed, the width of the large telop display character is larger than the width of the small telop display character (for example, a large telop) If the ratio of the character size of the small telop display to the size of the displayed character is the same as the ratio of the character sway of the small telop display to the character sway of the large telop display) Since the effect on the image and the effect on the small telop display appear to be relatively equal, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, in this feature 115IW, as the related display, a first related display that changes from a predetermined mode to a special mode in accordance with a change in the mode of the special effect (in this example, display of characters according to the progress of the super reach effect) The first telop display 115IW10 in which the speed stage changes and the second related display in which the aspect does not change in accordance with the change in the aspect of the special effect (in this example, the aspect is constant regardless of the progress of the super reach effect) The second telop display 115IW20) can be displayed (see FIG. 8-2). Thereby, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this feature 115IW, the characters in the second telop display 115IW20 are displayed without an action. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a display with an action (a character or an effect image can be moved and displayed, The text or effect image may blink, or the size, brightness, color, or transparency may change). Even in that case, the second telop display 115IW20 may be displayed in a certain manner without being affected by the change in the development mode of the super reach production.

  Further, in this feature 115IW, a first related display related to the production state (in this example, a first telop display 115IW10 indicating that the super reach production is being executed) and a second related display related to the gaming state. (In this example, the second telop display 115IW20 indicating that an error is being detected) can be displayed (see FIG. 8-2). Thereby, the production effect can be enhanced.

  The “first related display related to the performance state” is a display indicating that a predetermined performance (super reach production) is being executed, a display indicating that a specific performance mode is being controlled, and a player It may be a display that prompts an operation.

  “Second related display related to gaming state” includes a display indicating that an error is occurring, a predetermined gaming state (low probability low base state (normal state), low probability high base state (time reduction state) ), High-probability low-base state (latent state), high-probability high-base state (probability change state)), a display that prompts the player to hit the player (for example, a right-handed notification display), etc. There may be.

  In addition, the feature section 115IW can execute a predetermined effect (in this example, an image blur effect in which a plurality of displays are vibrated together) (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an image by performing step S172. The display area can be made to appear outside the display area (in this example, the display area outside 115IW30) in response to the execution of the predetermined effect, and straddle the display area outside area. The second related display can be displayed, and the display content of the second related display can be recognized when the second related display is displayed so as to straddle the area outside the display area (in this example, the area outside the display area The second telop display 115IW20 can be displayed so as to straddle the 115IW30, and the characters in the second telop display 115IW20 can be recognized (see FIG. 8-3)). It was. Thereby, the production effect can be enhanced.

  In this feature section 115IW, by displaying the character “error is occurring” at a position that does not overlap with the area outside the display area 115IW30, even when an image blur effect is performed, the second telop display 115IW20 Although configured to be able to recognize characters, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, when an “error is occurring” character is displayed at a position overlapping with the non-display area 115IW30 when an image blur effect is performed, the “error is occurring” character is not assimilated with the non-display area 115IW30. As described above, the character color of “error is occurring” may be different from the color of the display area outside area 115IW30 (for example, if the display area outside area 115IW30 is black, the “error occurrence” character is displayed in white), By displaying a non-transparent background (within the frame of the second telop display 115IW20) as in the feature section 115IW on the rear side of the “error occurrence”, characters in the second telop display 115IW20 can be recognized. It may be configured.

  Further, when some of the characters in the telop display become assimilated by assimilating into the non-display region 115IW30 when the display region outside region 115IW30 appears, the characters in the telop display are displayed outside the display region. By moving to a position that is not assimilated to 115IW30, all the characters in the outside display area 115IW30 may be made recognizable.

  Further, in the feature unit 115IW, the display means can display a related display and a specific display (in this example, a right-handed notification display 115IW40 that prompts a right-handed player in a specific gaming state) (in this example, an effect) The control CPU 120 displays the right-handed notification display 115IW40 based on the reception of the command indicating that it is in a specific gaming state in step S75), and also when displaying the specific display over the related display, The contents of the related display can be recognized (in this example, even when the right-handed notification display 115IW40 is displayed over the first telop display 115IW10, the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized (FIG. 8). -4 (1))). Thereby, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

  In addition, even if a specific display is displayed, as long as the content of 1st telop display 115IW10 can be recognized, it is not restricted to the thing to which a character moves.

  For example, by displaying a plurality of the same character information “SP reach!” On the first telop display 115IW10, it is difficult or impossible to recognize the content of the first telop display 115IW10 from one character information However, the content of the first telop display 115IW10 may be recognized from a plurality of the same character information.

  In addition, when the first telop display 115IW10 and the right-handed notification display 115IW40 are displayed in an overlapping manner, the effect control CPU 120 increases the volume of the SP-reaching music by making the volume of the SP-reaching instruction sound larger than the volume of the right-handed instruction voice. It is good also as making it easy to recognize the music in reach audibly, and recognizing the content of the 1st telop display 115IW10.

  Further, the specific display overlapped on the first telop display 115IW10 is not limited to the right-handed notification display 115IW40. For example, the content of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized in the same manner even if another telop display (hereinafter referred to as "third telop display") is displayed as a specific display in the first telop display 115IW10. It is good to do.

  In addition, in the case where the third telop display is displayed as a specific display on the first telop display 115IW10, the aspect of the first telop display 115IW10 may be different depending on the content suggested by the third telop display.

  For example, when the content suggested by the third telop display has a lower degree of attention than the content suggested by the first telop display 115IW10, the moving speed of the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 is higher than that of the third telop display. On the other hand, if the content suggested by the first telop display 115IW10 is less noticeable than the content suggested by the third telop display 115, the moving speed of the characters in the third telop display 115IW10 May be fast.

  Further, for example, when the first telop display 115IW10 and the third telop display indicate the content related to the same state (for example, the first telop display 115IW10 indicates that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, and the third telop display In the case of suggesting the content of the pre-reading notice effect), the moving speed of the characters in the first telop display 115IW10 and the third telop display may be the same.

  In addition, when the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed but the specific display is not displayed, the transition to the state in which the specific display is superimposed on the first telop display 115IW10 is difficult to recognize by the specific display. By displaying the contents of the first telop display 115IW10 that has become hidden at a position that is not hidden by the specific display (for example, displaying a new telop at another position or displaying a balloon), the first telop display The contents of 115IW10 may be recognized.

  In addition, the feature unit 115IW includes an operable movable body (in this example, the movable body 115IW50), the display unit can display a related display in a predetermined display area, and the movable body has at least a predetermined display. Even when the movable body is in the operating position during the display of the related display, the contents of the related display can be recognized (in this example, the display of the first telop display 115IW10). Even when the movable body 115IW50 is operated at a position overlapping the area, it is possible to recognize the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 (see FIG. 8-4 (2)). Thereby, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

  In addition, even if a movable body advances, if it can recognize the content of the 1st telop display 115IW10, it will not be restricted to the thing to which a character moves.

  For example, by displaying a plurality of the same character information “SP reach!” On the first telop display 115IW10, it is difficult or impossible to recognize the content of the first telop display 115IW10 from one character information However, the content of the first telop display 115IW10 may be recognized from a plurality of the same character information.

  In addition, when the display area of the first telop display 115IW10 and the position of the movable body 115IW50 overlap, the effect control CPU 120 is performing SP reach rather than the sound volume corresponding to operating the movable body 115IW50. The volume of the music may be increased to make it easier to audibly recognize the music in the SP reach, so that the contents of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized.

  Further, it is possible to display a telop display A that can be difficult to see by the operation of the movable body 115IW50 and a telop display B that does not become difficult to view by the operation of the movable body 115IW50. Even when it cannot be recognized, since the movable body 115IW50 does not overlap the telop display B, the content of the telop display B may be recognizable. Note that the suggested contents of the telop display A and the telop display B may be the same or different from each other.

  When the movable body 115IW50 is moved to the advanced position from the state where the first telop display 115IW10 is displayed but the movable body 115IW50 is located at the retracted position (the state where the first telop display 115IW10 is visible). The contents of the first telop display 115IW10 that has become difficult to recognize by the movable body 115IW50 are displayed at a position that is not hidden by the movable body 115IW50 (for example, a new telop is displayed at another position or a balloon display is displayed. ) So that the contents of the first telop display 115IW10 can be recognized.

  The feature 115IW includes first display means (in this example, the image display device 5) and second display means (in this example, the sub-image display device 115IW60) as display means. And the second display means (in this example, the first telop display 115IW10 can be displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60 (FIG. 8-4). (See (3))). Thereby, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

  As the second display means, a dot matrix LED display device (dot matrix type display in which LEDs are arranged in a two-dimensional array) and a versatile lighter (a plurality of LEDs arranged on the longitudinal side surface of the plate) are short according to a specific pattern. It is good also as providing the display apparatus which displays various effect images using the afterimage of the light of LED produced by rotating a board | plate body, making it blink with a period.

  Further, when displaying a related display across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60, a non-display region (for example, between the display region of the image display device 5 and the display region of the sub-image display device 115IW60) By making it possible to display characters larger than the sizes of the image display device 5 and the frame portion of the sub-image display device 115IW60, it is possible to prevent the related display characters from being difficult or impossible to recognize due to the non-display area. Also good.

  Further, when displaying the telop display across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60, the telop display characters are displayed only on one display device (the display area of the telop display is the same as the image display device 5). (It is provided across the sub-image display device 115IW60, but the text information of the telop display may be displayed only on one display device).

  Also, a telop display A that displays characters across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60, and a telop display B that displays characters without straddling the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60. The size of the characters that can be displayed and displayed in the telop display A and the telop display B may be different. For example, the size of a telop display character displayed across the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60 is larger than the size of a telop display character displayed on only one of the display devices. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance from being ugly.

  Further, the image display device 5 and the sub-image display device 115IW60 are not limited to those adjacent in the left and right, and may be adjacent in the vertical direction.

  In addition, this feature section 115IW executes a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an image blur effect by performing step S172. ), As the related display, the first specific related display (in this example, the first telop display 115IW10) that receives the change due to the specific effect, and the second specific related display (in this example, that does not receive the change due to the specific effect). The second telop display 115IW20) can be displayed (see FIG. 8-3 (2)). Thereby, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

  In addition, the specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays is not limited to the image blur effect that vibrates a plurality of displays together. For example, a reduction effect that reduces a plurality of displays and a plurality of displays that are enlarged An enlarged effect to be displayed may be executed, and the first telop display 115IW10 may receive a change due to the reduction effect or the enlargement effect, while the second telop display 115IW20 may not receive a change due to the reduction effect or the enlargement effect.

  In addition, this feature section 115IW executes a specific effect that gives a common change to a plurality of displays displayed on the display means (in this example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an image blur effect by performing step S172. ), The display means can display the related display in a mode with an action, and the related display can be displayed in a mode with an action even when the display is changed by executing a specific effect (in this example) Even when the image blur effect is performed, the characters of the first telop display 115IW10 are moved and displayed (see FIG. 8-3 (2)). Thereby, a related display can be displayed more suitably.

  In addition, the characters displayed in the telop display are not limited to those that are moved and displayed in a straight line, but those that move and display in a ring-shaped area, those that move and display in a zigzag area, The region extending in the horizontal direction (strictly speaking, the region depicted on the plane that seems to extend in the horizontal direction (that is, the region depicted on the display screen of the image display device 5)) is moved and displayed so that it can be viewed stereoscopically. May be.

(Explanation regarding feature 31AK and feature 115IW)
It is good also as a gaming machine provided with both the characteristic part 31AK and the characteristic part 115IW mentioned above. For example, the title display in the feature section 31AK is displayed as the related display in the feature section 115IW (the title display mode of the reach effect is changed from the first stage to the second stage in accordance with the change in the reach effect mode) It is good.

  Further, for example, the title display of the first suggestion effect (for example, Super Reach A or Super Reach B) in the feature portion 31AK is used as the first related display in the feature portion 115IW, and the second suggestion effect (for example, Super Reach D or The title display of Super Reach E) may be the second related display in the feature portion 115IW (specifically, the title display mode of the first suggestion effect (for example, Super Reach A or Super Reach B) is Super Reach A or Super Reach. The title display mode of the second suggestion effect (for example, super reach D or super reach E) does not change according to the change of the mode of super reach D or super reach E.

  Further, for example, the expectation level suggestion display in the feature part 31AK may be displayed as the related display in the feature part 115IW.

(Explanation regarding feature 38SH and feature 115IW)
It is good also as a gaming machine provided with both the characteristic part 38SH and the characteristic part 115IW mentioned above. Here, the characteristic part 38SH includes the characteristic part 38SH (39SH), the characteristic part 38SH (40SH), the characteristic part 38SH (41SH), and the characteristic part 38SH (42SH). For example, the related display in the feature portion 38SH and the related display in the feature portion 115IW may be the same.

(Explanation regarding feature 005SG)
Next, the characteristic part 005SG will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the characteristic portion 005SG includes a first origin position that is above the front side of the image display device 5 and a first position that is below the first origin position and in front of the display area 5E of the image display device 5. A first movable body 005SG301 that can move up and down with respect to the advance position, a second origin position that is below the front side of the image display device 5, a position directly above the second origin position, and a display area 5E of the image display device 5 And a second movable body 005SG401 that can move in the vertical direction between the second advance positions that are in front, and a three-dimensional image can be displayed on the image display device 5, and these first movable bodies 005SG301. And the second movable body 005SG401 and the display by the stereoscopic display on the image display device 5 can be executed.

  The first movable body 005SG301 of the feature portion 005SG is divided into a first movable portion 005SG301A and a first movable portion 005SG301A that are slidably movable with respect to a base portion (not shown) provided on the first movable body 005SG301. And a second movable portion 005SG301B provided so as to be slidable.

  FIG. 9A is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the image display device, a display state in the image display device, and a visual state of a stereoscopic image by both eyes of the player. The image display device 5 in the feature section 005SG can display a 2D image and can also display a 3D image. Next, a configuration for displaying a stereoscopically viewable 3D image on the image display device 5 will be briefly described.

  As illustrated in FIG. 9A, the image display device 5 includes an image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 that displays a 3D image that is a stereoscopic image (video) as a stereoscopically viewable image, and a rear side of the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900. A backlight 005SG901 that emits planar light toward the front side, and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 provided at a predetermined interval from the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900. The image display device is a parallax barrier type autostereoscopic liquid crystal display device. The image display device 5 displays the decorative symbols during the special symbol variable display period by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B.

  The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 is a shutter that prevents the player's left eye from visually recognizing the right eye image displayed in a vertically long strip shape on the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 and prevents the player's right eye from visually recognizing the left eye image. A parallax barrier that displays a parallax barrier image having a vertical stripe-shaped black portion and a transparent portion that allows the player's right eye to visually recognize the right-eye image and the player's left eye to visually recognize the left-eye image. The liquid crystal panel has a relatively high light transparency that allows an image display state and a transmissive state in which all pixels are not transparent and have no vertical stripe-shaped black portion.

  In other words, the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 of the feature 005SG includes a parallax barrier including a parallax barrier for preventing the player's left eye from viewing the right eye image and the player's right eye from viewing the left eye image. Display and full transmission display without displaying the parallax barrier are possible.

  In this feature section 005SG, an example in which the image display device 5 uses a liquid crystal display device as the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the device of the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 includes a CRT ( You may comprise by display apparatuses of other image display forms, such as a Cathode Ray Tube), FED (Field Emission Display), PDP (Plasma Display Panel), dot matrix LED, an organic or inorganic electroluminescent (EL) panel.

  Further, the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 is fixedly provided at a position on the back side of the game board 2 and in front of the player side overlapping the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores two-dimensional (2D) image data or three-dimensional (3D) image data for displaying a three-dimensional image composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in accordance with the received effect control command (display control). A command for reading out necessary data from the unit 123) is output to the VDP (display control unit 123).

  In FIG. 9A, the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 has a predetermined width in the vertical direction, which forms a stereoscopic image read from the image data ROM based on an instruction from the CPU 120 for effect control by VDP. The right-eye image (R) and the left-eye image (L) are alternately displayed. In the present characteristic portion 005SG, the display widths of the right-eye image (R) and the left-eye image (L) are uniform. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display width is set at the center of the screen. And the end portion may be different.

  For example, when the player's viewpoint position is at X0 and D0, which are reference positions, images corresponding to X0 and D0 are displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 as shown in FIG. As for the right eye, each left-eye image (L) displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 is hidden and blocked by a black belt portion (shutter; also referred to as a non-transmissive portion), and each right-eye image ( R) is visually recognized through a non-black belt portion (blank; also referred to as a transmissive portion), so that only the right eye image (R) is provided to the right eye, while the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 is provided for the left eye. Each right-eye image (R) displayed on the screen is hidden and blocked by a black belt portion (shutter; also referred to as a non-transmissive portion), and each left-eye image (L) is blocked by a non-black belt portion (blank; Also called transmission part By seeing through the screen, only the left eye image (L) is provided to the left eye, so that the player can view a stereoscopic image in a naked eye state without wearing deflection glasses or the like. be able to.

  In FIG. 9A, in order to help understanding, the distance between the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910 and the player's eyes is compared with the distance between the image liquid crystal panel 005SG900 and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910. For convenience of illustration, the crossing position where the line segments indicating the line of sight of the right eye and the left eye cross is moved to the front side or the rear side from the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 005SG910. However, the actual amount of movement of these intersection positions is very small.

  In this feature 005SG, stereoscopic vision is performed in which depth is sensed using binocular parallax in the line-of-sight direction of an image that can be seen by the right eye and the left eye. When the player visually recognizes the 3D image displayed on the image display device 5 with both eyes, the line of sight when the right eye and the left eye visually recognize an arbitrary part in the 3D image are different. Depth can be sensed by the amount of parallax. A position where the line-of-sight directions intersect is referred to as a convergence position, and an angle formed by the line-of-sight direction at the convergence position is referred to as a convergence angle. If this angle of convergence is large, the player senses that the 3D image is close to him, and if the angle of convergence is small, the player senses that the 3D image is far from him. Yes.

  In this feature 005SG, as described later, a 3D image (see FIGS. 9-3 (A) and (B)) displayed on the image display device 5 in the first movable body effect is displayed from the image display surface of the image display device 5. Although the convergence position is set so that it appears to protrude toward the front side (side approaching the player), the convergence position A where the apparent protrusion state of the 3D image is small and the apparent protrusion state of the effect image are It is possible to set a large convergence position B, a distance corresponding to the rear part of the first movable body 005SG301, and a portion where a 3D image appears to be at a convergence distance A far from the player, and the first movable body 005SG301 A distance corresponding to the front portion and a portion where a 3D image appears to be present at a convergence distance B close to the player may be realized.

  As a result, in the first movable unit 005SG301A that is inclined forward at the close position, the apparent protrusion of the 3D image is different between the rear part near the display area 5E and the front part far away from the first movable part 005SG301A. Can do. In addition to the convergence positions A and B, an effect in which a plurality of convergence positions are set may be executable.

  Further, in the feature portion 005SG, an effect image 005SG004 (see FIG. 9-3A) corresponding to a first movable body 005SG301 described later at the convergence position B and a fragment image 005SG006 (FIG. 9) not corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301. -3 (B)) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, only a part of the effect image is set to the convergence position B, and other parts are separated from the convergence position B. The position may be set. For example, in the effect image, only the vicinity of the periphery of the first movable body 005SG301 is set as the convergence position B, and the convergence position is set so that it appears to approach the player side as it moves away from the first movable body 005SG301. May be.

  Further, in this feature 005SG, the convergence position is set so that the 3D image displayed on the image display device 5 is projected to the front side (side approaching the player) from the image display surface of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the congestion position is set so that the effect image can be seen behind the display surface of the image display device 5 (the side far from the player). May be set.

  Further, in the feature section 005SG, the effect image 005SG004 (see FIG. 9A) displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in the state of being set at the convergence position B, and the convergence position B is the first movable position. By performing control so as to be within a predetermined range in the front-rear direction of the body 005SG301, the first movable body 005SG301 in the proximity position and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 can be viewed in an integrated manner. As a result, powerful performance can be implemented.

  Further, when the first movable body 005SG301 is located at a position close to the front side of the image display device 5, the first movable body 005SG301 hides in the display area 5E of the image display device 5 so that the player can use both eyes. An area that cannot be visually recognized is generated, and an area that the player can visually recognize with one eye but cannot be visually recognized with the other eye is generated. When a 3D image is displayed in such an area that can be viewed only with one eye, the 3D image cannot be viewed stereoscopically, and the 3D image may appear blurred and blurred. For this reason, a 3D image is not displayed (or replaced with a 2D image) in the display area 5E in the vicinity of the first movable body 005SG301, which is an area that can be viewed only with one eye, and is slightly different from the first movable body 005SG301. A 3D image may be displayed only in a distant display area that is visible to the player with both eyes. In particular, when the 3D image is a moving image and the 3D image operates together with the first movable body 005SG301, it is effective to display the 3D image only in the display area that the player can visually recognize with both eyes.

  In addition, in this feature part 005SG, a form in which a 3D image can be displayed in a first movable body effect to be described later is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second movable body effect and other effects ( For example, a 3D image may be displayed in a notice effect or a jackpot effect, or a decorative symbol may be displayed as a 3D image.

  In this feature 005SG, a stereoscopic image is displayed by an image display device including a parallax barrier type naked-eye stereoscopic display liquid crystal display device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lenticular lens method is used. Alternatively, a stereoscopic image may be displayed using an integral imaging autostereoscopic display liquid crystal display device. Further, the stereoscopic vision is not limited to the one that performs stereoscopic viewing with the naked eye, and may be configured to perform stereoscopic viewing by wearing deflection glasses or the like.

  In addition, in this feature part 005SG, regardless of whether or not the first movable body 005SG301 operates, the 3D image corresponding to the first movable part 005SG301A at a predetermined timing in the development effect of the first movable body effect described later. Although the form which displays the blade edge | tip image 005SG002 and the effect image 005SG003 which are 2D images corresponding to a certain effect image 005SG004 and 2nd movable part 005SG301B is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, 1st movable body 005SG301 May not be displayed for some reason, the above-mentioned blade edge image 005SG002, effect image 005SG003, effect image 005SG004, etc. may not be displayed.

  The effect image may be displayed together with an image simulating the first movable body 005SG301 as an image corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 at a predetermined timing in the development effect. Further, an image corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 (an image imitating the first movable body 005SG301, an effect image, or the like) is always displayed even when the first movable body 005SG301 is operating normally. You may make it display on the area | region corresponding to the back side of body 005SG301. By doing in this way, even if the first movable body 005SG301 does not operate for some reason, it is difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to avoid stopping the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1A.

(Example of production operations of the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect)
Next, an example operation of the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 9A and 9B are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect operation of the movable body effect. FIGS. 9A and 9B are diagrams showing details of the example operation of the first movable body effect, and FIG. 9C is a diagram showing an image display example.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 9-2 (A) when the variation pattern corresponds to super reach, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (B). In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of variable display, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the variable display of the central decorative symbol display area 5C is continued to reach. A normal reach production is executed as an aspect. Next, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (C), after the losing symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C, variable display is started again as shown in FIG. 9-2 (D). The super reach production starts. After execution of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 9-2 (E), the losing symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C.

  When execution of the first movable body effect is determined as the development effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 (F) and (G), the first movable body 005SG301 is moved away from the first origin position. After moving to an intermediate position that is a position between one origin position and the first advance position, a first proximity position that is behind the first advance position and close to the display area 5E of the image display device 5 from the intermediate position The second movable portion 005SG301B is moved relative to the first movable body 005SG301A in accordance with the movement up to and including the blade edge image and effect image imitating the second movable portion 005SG301B in the display area 5E of the image display device 5. The first movable body effect is executed. At this time, the first movable body 005SG301 changes (deforms) from a normal mode in which the second movable portion 005SG301B protrudes so as to be visible from the player to a contracted mode housed in the first movable body 005SG301.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), the effect control CPU 120, in the first movable body effect, contracts from the normal mode while moving the first movable body 005SG301 from the intermediate position toward the close position. By deforming the first movable body 005SG301, the first movable body 005SG301 moves rearward and downward so as to approach the central decorative symbol display area 5C, which is the substantially central position of the rear display area E, from the front intermediate position.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 slightly enlarges and displays the symbol image 005SG001 of the decorative symbol (the symbol “6”) displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C according to the above-described operation, and the second movable portion. A blade edge image 005SG002 imitating 005SG301B is displayed so as to overlap the design image 005SG001. Thus, in the first movable body effect, the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the symbol image 005SG001 displayed in the display area 5E, and the image display device 5 is contracted. The blade edge image 005SG301B corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B capable of recognizing the normal aspect before being deformed into the first movable part 005SG301A is located at the portion where the second movable part 005SG301B is located in the display area 5E when it is in the normal aspect. By displaying the design image 005SG001 in a transparent manner so that it can be seen connected to the lower part of the screen, it is possible to make it appear three-dimensionally as if the second movable part 005SG301B is located on the far side through the display area 5E. This makes it possible to recognize the sword that is one object. That is, it becomes possible to recognize one object (first movable body 005SG301) in the normal mode before being transformed into the contracted mode by the first movable unit 005SG301A that is an object and the blade edge image 005SG002 that is a display image.

  Further, the first movable body 005SG301 has a forward tilt posture at the close position, and the blade edge image 005SG002 is tapered toward the rear that can be visually recognized when the second movable portion 005SG301B is located at the protruding position. As a result, in the design image 005SG001, the cutting edge pierces the position corresponding to the boundary between the first movable part 005SG301A and the second movable part 005SG301B, and the second movable part 005SG301B is located on the back side through the display area 5E. Can be seen in three dimensions.

  Further, an effect image 005SG003 for highlighting the blade edge image 005SG002 is displayed around the blade edge image 005SG002 in the display area 5E, and a first movable part 005SG301A is provided around the first movable part 005SG301A in the display area 5E. An effect image 005SG004 for highlighting is displayed. These effect images 005SG003, 005SG004 are of the same type imitating flames with different aspects, and are displayed so as to surround them at positions corresponding to the periphery of the first movable portion 005SG301A and the blade edge image 005SG002. The first movable part 005SG301A and the blade edge image 005SG002 can recognize one object more strongly.

  Further, by displaying the crack image 005SG005 on the symbol image 005SG001, it can be seen that the symbol image 005SG001 is about to be destroyed by being stabbed. Further, after the crack image 005SG005 is gradually enlarged and displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the design image 005SG001 is erased, and when the decorative design is destroyed, a plurality of fragment images 005SG006 of the decorative design are displayed. An image that appears to be scattered around is displayed. Also, by displaying the effect image 005SG007 that emphasizes that the decorative symbol is destroyed, it is possible to strongly recognize that the decorative symbol is destroyed and variable display is resumed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays a part of the images (the effect image 005SG004 and the fragment image 005SG006 for highlighting the first movable portion 005SG301A) as a stereoscopically viewable 3D image, Other images (design image 005SG001, cutting edge image 005SG002, effect image 005SG003, crack image 005SG005) can be controlled to be displayed as a 2D image.

  By doing in this way, it is possible to realize a stereoscopic effect with respect to the effect image 005SG004 and the fragment image 005SG006 that are desired to appear on the near side of the display area 5E. In particular, with respect to the effect image 005SG004, the effect is located in the vicinity of the first movable portion 005SG301A that is actually in front of the display region 5E, that is, in a position away from the display region 5E in the same manner as the first movable portion 005SG301A. It can appear as if the image 005SG004 is displayed.

  On the other hand, the other design image 005SG001, blade edge image 005SG002, effect image 005SG003, and crack image 005SG005 are displayed as 2D images, and the design image 005SG001, effect image 005SG003, and crack image 005SG005 are positioned in the display area 5E. The image 005SG002 can be made to appear to be located on the back side with respect to the display area 5E, so that a sense of depth can be generated.

  In this feature 005SG, as shown in FIG. 9C, the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 is a 3D image, and the effect image 005SG003 corresponding to the blade edge image 005SG002 is a 2D image. The display control based on the display pattern A to be performed (display pattern A shown in FIG. 9C) is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body as in the display pattern B Both the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to 005SG301 and the effect image 005SG003 corresponding to the blade edge image 005SG002 are displayed as a 3D image, or the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 is displayed as a 2D image as in display pattern C. While The effect image 005SG003 corresponding to the leading image 005SG002 is displayed as a 3D image, and the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 and the effect image 005SG003 corresponding to the cutting edge image 005SG002 are both displayed as a 2D image as in the display pattern D. May be displayed.

  The display patterns A to D may be determined at different ratios depending on whether or not the display result is a big hit. For example, the display pattern A, the display pattern B, the display pattern C, and the display pattern You may set so that reliability may become high in order of D.

  Returning to FIG. 9-2 (E), when the lost symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C, when the second movable body effect of the effect pattern B is determined as the development effect type, As shown in FIG. 9-2 (H), the first movable body 005SG301 is moved from the first origin position to the first advanced position, and the second movable body 005SG401 is moved from the second origin position to the second advanced position. At the same time, the second movable body effect for displaying the effect image on the display area 5E of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Although not shown in detail, after the first movable body effect or the second movable body effect is performed, a super reach reach effect (a weak super reach with a low jackpot expectation level or a strong super reach with a high jackpot expectation level). In the case of a big hit, after a combination stop display of the big hit symbol, the big hit effect is executed in response to the start of the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, in the case of losing, the combination of losing symbols is stopped and displayed, and when the stored storage is 1 or more, the next variable display is started.

  In addition, in this feature part 005SG, although the form which can perform a 1st movable body effect and a 2nd movable body effect during variable display was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, and it is the first during variable display. The ratio of controlling to the big hit gaming state may be different between the case where the first movable body effect is executed and the case where the second movable body effect is executed. In addition, when the first movable body effect is executed during the variable display and when the second movable body effect is executed, the ratio of executing the weak super reach reach effect during the variable display and the strong super reach The ratio at which the reach effect is executed may be different.

As described above, the feature 005SG includes the following first invention. In other words, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an operable movable body, for example, as described in JP 2011-194091 A, the movable body provided above the display means is displayed on the display means. Some of them were able to execute a movable body effect that rotates so as to hit the area (act on the display area). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, there is a problem that the effect of producing the movable body is insufficient because the movable body only moves toward the display area of the display means. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of moving body production, the gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention is:
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
Display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the image display device 5);
An operable movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG301);
With
The movable body operates toward the display area of the display means, and a movable body effect can be executed by displaying a specific image corresponding to the movable body on the display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control). However, in the first movable body effect, the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the display area 5E, and the image display device 5 can recognize the normal mode before being transformed into the contracted mode. The part which displays the blade edge | tip image 005SG002 corresponding to 2nd movable part 005SG301B (refer FIG. 9-3)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the blade edge image 005SG002 is displayed as a specific image corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 when the first movable body 005SG301 operates from the front of the image display device 5 toward the display area 5E. The effect of the first movable body effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, not only the first movable body 005SG301 is moved so as to approach the display area 5E from the front to the rear, but also the blade edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B of the first movable body 005SG301 is displayed. Since the second movable part 005SG301B, which is a part of the first movable body 005SG301, can be seen in three dimensions so as to be on the back side of the display area 5E, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The movable body can be deformed into a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode, and is deformed from the first mode to the second mode when operating toward the display area of the display means. (For example, in response to an operation in which the production control CPU 120 moves the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 rearward and downward so as to approach the display area 5E of the image display device 5, the second movable portion 005SG301B is housed in the first movable part 005SG301A to change from the normal mode to the contracted mode)
In the movable body effect, it is possible to recognize an aspect before deformation of the movable body by displaying an image corresponding to the movable body of the first aspect as the specific image on the display means (for example, for controlling the effect) In the first movable body effect, the CPU 120 moves the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 toward the display area 5E and recognizes the normal mode before being transformed into the contracted mode by the image display device 5. The part which displays the blade edge | tip image 005SG002 corresponding to possible 2nd movable part 005SG301B (refer FIG. 9-3).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the action of the first movable body 005SG301 on the display area 5E can be emphasized in that the normal state before the deformation of the first movable body 005SG301 can be recognized by the first movable body effect. The effect of moving body production can be further enhanced.

  Specifically, the first movable body 005SG301A can be brought closer to the display area 5E than the case where the first movable body 005SG301 is deformed to the contraction mode and moved toward the display area 5E in the normal mode. The second movable portion 005SG301B, which is a part of the first movable body 005SG301, can be seen three-dimensionally so as to be located on the far side of the display area 5E.

  Further, according to the actual operation of the first movable part 005SG301A, the blade edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B is displayed in association with the first movable part 005SG301A, thereby being the first movable body that is one object. Since 005SG301 can be recognized, a powerful first movable body effect can be realized.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
In the movable body effect, the movable body operates toward the effect display while displaying the effect display on the display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the first movable object effect in the first movable object effect. A portion for moving the first movable portion 005SG301A of the movable body 005SG301 toward the symbol image 005SG001 displayed in the display area 5E),
The display means can display an image that penetrates the effect display as the specific image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize the normal mode before being transformed into the contracted mode by the image display device 5). By displaying the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B in a transparent manner on the design image 005SG001, the three-dimensional shape is formed so that the second movable portion 005SG301B is located on the back side through the display area 5E. (See Figure 9-3)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to realize an effect linked with the symbol image 005SG001 displayed on the image display device 5 and to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The display means can display a special image that can be stereoscopically viewed,
In the movable body effect, an image that emphasizes the movable body can be displayed as the special image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 emphasizes the effect image 005SG004 and the fragment image 005SG006 for highlighting the first movable portion 005SG301A. Is a portion that can be displayed as a stereoscopically viewable 3D image (see FIG. 9-3 (A)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a stereoscopic effect can be realized by displaying the effect image 005SG004 as a special image that emphasizes the first movable body 005SG301, and the interest can be improved. Specifically, since the effect image 005SG004 can be shown as being displayed on the near side at a position corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 on the near side of the display area 5E, a more stereoscopic effect can be realized.

  Further, in the present characteristic section 005SG, the form using the image display device 5 capable of displaying a 3D image is illustrated as an example of the display unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a 2D image is displayed. Possible display means may be used.

  Further, in the feature portion 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301 is exemplified to be deformed from the normal mode to the contracted mode when moving from the intermediate position toward the close position, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the first movable body 005SG301 may be moved toward the close position while being deformed from the normal mode to the contracted mode at the intermediate position or the first origin position.

The feature 005SG includes the following second invention. In other words, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an operable movable body, for example, as described in JP 2011-194091 A, the movable body provided above the display means is displayed on the display means. Some of them were able to execute a movable body effect that rotates so as to hit the area (act on the display area). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, there is a problem that the effect of producing the movable body is insufficient because the movable body only moves toward the display area of the display means. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of moving body production, the gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is:
A gaming machine capable of playing games (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
Display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the image display device 5);
An operable movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG301);
With
The movable body operates toward the display area of the display means, and a movable body effect can be executed by displaying a special image that can be viewed stereoscopically on the display means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) In the first movable body effect, the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the display area 5E, and the effect image 005SG004 for highlighting the first movable portion 005SG301A on the image display device 5 is displayed. A portion that can be displayed as a stereoscopically viewable 3D image (see FIG. 9-3 (A))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect image 005SG004 corresponding to the first movable portion 005SG301A is displayed as a special image that can be stereoscopically viewed when the first movable body 005SG301 operates from the front of the image display device 5 toward the display area 5E. Therefore, the effect of the first movable body effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, the operation mode of the first movable body 005SG301 is displayed by displaying a special image that can be stereoscopically viewed in accordance with the timing at which the first movable body 005SG301 operates from the front to the rear display area 5E of the image display device 5. In addition, since a sense of depth can be generated in the display mode of the special image by the image display device 5, it is possible to further enhance the effect.

A gaming machine according to means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
In the movable body effect, the display unit displays the special image in an area around the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the image display device 5 in the first movable body effect to A portion that can be displayed as a stereoscopically viewable 3D image of an effect image 005SG004 for highlighting one movable portion 005SG301A (see FIG. 9A).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a stereoscopic effect can be realized by displaying the effect image 005SG004 as a special image, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
In the movable body effect, the display unit displays the special image with an amount of parallax such that an image appears ahead of the display unit (for example, to highlight the first movable unit 005SG301A). Regarding the effect image 005SG004, the effect image 005SG004 is located in the vicinity of the first movable portion 005SG301A that is actually in front of the display region 5E, that is, in the same position as the first movable portion 005SG301A, away from the display region 5E. The part that can appear as if it is displayed (see Fig. 9-3 (A))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the action of the first movable body 005SG301 on the display area 5E can be emphasized, and the effect of producing the first movable body effect can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The movable body can be transformed into a first mode and a second mode reduced than the first mode,
The movable body of the second aspect operates toward the display area of the display means, and the movable body effect is performed in which the display means displays a specific image corresponding to a part of the movable body of the first aspect. Is possible,
The display means displays the special image in at least one of an area around the specific image and an area around the movable body (for example, the production control CPU 120 performs the first movable body in the first movable body production. The first movable portion 005SG301A of the body 005SG301 is moved toward the display area 5E, and the blade edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B that can recognize the normal mode before being transformed into the contracted mode on the image display device 5. And an effect image for highlighting the blade edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B, and an effect image 005SG004 for highlighting the first movable portion 005SG301A. 2D image for image 005SG003 Capable Shimesuru portion. FIG. 9-3 (A) see)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the action of the first movable body 005SG301 on the display area 5E can be emphasized and specified in that the normal state before the deformation of the first movable body 005SG301 can be recognized by the first movable body effect. The special image and the movable body are displayed in that the effect image 005SG004, which is a special image, is displayed in the area around the blade edge image 005SG301 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B, which is an image, and the area around the first movable part 005SG301A. The sense of unity can be emphasized more, and the effect of producing the first movable body can be further enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
In the movable body effect, a special image having a shape imitating a small piece can be displayed on the display unit as the special image (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can stereoscopically display a decorative design fragment image 005SG006. (See Fig. 9-3 (B))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the action image with respect to the display area 5E of the first movable body 005SG301 can be emphasized by the fragment image 005SG006 as a special image imitating a small piece, and the production effect of the first movable body effect can be further enhanced. it can.

The feature portion 005SG includes the following third invention. In other words, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an operable movable body, for example, as described in JP 2011-194091 A, the movable body provided above the display means is displayed on the display means. Some of them were able to execute a movable body effect that rotates so as to hit the area (act on the display area). In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, there is a problem that the effect of producing the movable body is insufficient because the movable body only moves toward the display area of the display means. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine that can enhance the effect of using a movable body, the gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the image display device 5);
An operable movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG301);
With
The movable body can be transformed into a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode,
The first effect of performing the first operation in which the movable body operates toward the display area of the display unit in the first aspect, and the second operation different from the first operation in the second aspect of the movable body. The first movable body effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first movable body 005SG301 from the first origin position to the first advanced position). The second movable body 005SG301 is moved from the first origin position toward the first advanced position and the second movable body 005SG401 is moved from the second origin position toward the second advanced position. (Part that can perform movable body production)
The proportion controlled to the advantageous state is different between the case where the first effect is executed and the case where the second effect is executed (for example, the case where the first movable object effect is executed during super reach and the case where the first effect is executed). (2) The ratio of control to the big hit gaming state differs when the movable body effect is executed (refer to FIG. 10-13).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, one movable body 005SG301 can realize different movable body effects with different modes and operations, and pay attention to which of the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect is executed. Let me improve my interest.

A gaming machine according to means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1,
The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, a first movable body 005SG301) and a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 005SG401) different from the first movable body,
In the second presentation, the second movable body can operate together with the first movable body (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 moves the first movable body 005SG301 from the first origin position toward the first advance position). And the second movable body effect that moves the second movable body 005SG401 from the second origin position toward the second advance position (see FIG. 9-2 (H)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of producing the second movable body can be enhanced.

A gaming machine according to means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2, wherein
In the first performance, the second movable body is operable to overlap the front of the first movable body and cover at least a part of the deformation mechanism of the first movable body (for example, The second movable body 005SG401 overlaps in front of the first movable body 005SG301 when moving to the second advance position, and at least a part of the deformation mechanism of the first movable body 005SG301 (for example, the first movable body 005SG301). A portion operable to cover a boundary portion P between the portion 005SG301A and the second movable portion 005SG301B, etc. (Modification, see FIG. 9-4)
It is characterized by that.

  For example, in the second movable body effect, when the first movable body 005SG301 moves to the first advanced position and the second movable body 005SG401 moves to the second advanced position, the second movable body 005SG401 can be contracted and deformed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the second movable body 005SG401 includes a second movable body 005SG301. When moving to the advance position, it overlaps in front of the first movable body 005SG301 and at least a part of the deformation mechanism of the first movable body 005SG301 (for example, the first movable section 005SG301A and the second movable section 005SG301B) It may be possible to operate so as to cover the boundary portion P). By doing in this way, the visibility of a deformation | transformation mechanism can be reduced and the appearance of a 2nd movable body effect can be improved.

A gaming machine according to means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The display means (for example, the image display device 5) can perform variable display effects (for example, reach effects by decorative symbols, etc.),
In the variable display effect, a second special variable display effect having a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first special variable display effect depending on whether the first effect or the second effect is executed. The executed ratio is different (for example, when the first movable body effect is executed as the development effect, it is easy to shift to the weak super reach after the development effect, and when the second movable body effect is executed, after the development effect, Parts that are likely to shift to strong super reach, etc. (See Figure 10-13)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the player comes to notice which movable body effect is executed during the reach effect, the interest can be improved.

  Although the characteristic portion 005SG of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic portions 005SG, and the present invention can be changed or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

  For example, in the feature portion 005SG, in the first movable body effect, the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the display area 5E, and the image display device 5 corresponds to the second movable portion 005SG301B. In this example, the first movable body 005SG301, which is one object, can be recognized by displaying the cutting edge image 005SG002. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body 005SG301 is not necessarily limited to this. The first movable body 005SG301 does not have to be recognizable by the cutting edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the first movable section 005SG301A and the second movable section 005SG301B. For example, the first movable section of the first movable body 005SG301 When 005SG301A is moved toward the display area 5E Further, in the image display device 5, an effect image for highlighting the first movable body 005SG301 as a specific image corresponding to the first movable body 005SG301 (for example, as if the first movable body 005SG301 collided with the display area 5E). It is also possible to display an image to be shown).

  In the feature portion 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301, which is an example of a movable body, is an object that imitates a sword, and the first movable portion 005SG301A and the second movable portion that can be stored in the first movable portion 005SG301A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body is not limited to an object imitating a sword. Further, it is not shrinkable and deformable, and for example, it may be deformable by extension or enlargement, or may be deformable by deformation from a circular shape to a square shape. Furthermore, it may be composed of an object that cannot be deformed.

  In the feature portion 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301 is used as an example of the movable body. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second movable body 005SG401 may be used. Other movable bodies may be used.

  In the feature portion 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301, which is an example of a movable body, moves forward and downward from the first origin position toward the intermediate position, and can move rearward and downward from the intermediate position toward the proximity position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first origin position is set as the left and right side position of the display area 5E as long as the operation is possible toward the display area 5E. Further, it may be movable in the left-right direction from the left-right side position to the intermediate position.

  In the feature portion 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301, which is an example of a movable body, moves forward and downward from the first origin position toward the intermediate position, that is, moves in a direction away from the display area 5E. Although illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, You may make it move to the front lower direction directly toward a proximity | contact position, without passing through an intermediate position from a 1st origin position. In addition, when the first origin position is the left / right side position of the display area 5E, the first origin position may be movable in the left / right direction along the display area 5E from the left / right side position to the intermediate position. Further, it may be movable in a curved shape so as to gradually approach from the first origin position toward the proximity position.

  In the feature portion 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301, which is an example of the movable body, is illustrated as moving closer to the display area 5E by moving (moving) from the intermediate position toward the proximity position. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, by deforming the movable body from the contracted mode to the normal mode (from the normal mode to the expanded mode), at least a part of the movable body approaches the display region 5E, The movable body includes a structure in which at least a part of the movable body approaches the display area 5E by rotating. The image display device 5 may be operable toward the first movable body 005SG301.

  In the feature portion 005SG, as an example of the specific image corresponding to the movable body, the image using the blade edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B which is a part of the first movable body 005SG301 in the image display device 5 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may not necessarily be an image capable of recognizing one object as long as it is a specific image corresponding to a movable body. In addition, the image that enables recognition of one object does not necessarily indicate a part of the movable body. For example, by displaying an effect image 005SG004 for highlighting the second movable portion 005SG301B or the like. The first movable body 005SG301 that is one object may be recognized.

  In addition, the movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG301) is operated toward the display region without being deformed, and a special image imitating an object different from the movable body as the specific image corresponding to the movable body (for example, By displaying the second movable body 005SG401), another object including the movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG301 and the second movable body 005SG401 is combined with the movable body and the special image). (One object) may be recognizable.

  Further, in the feature part 005SG, the blade edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable part 005SG301B is displayed as a specific image so that the first movable body 005SG301, which is one object, can be recognized in a close position. Although the form which displays the blade edge | tip image 005SG002 in the downward vicinity position of 1st movable body 005SG301 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The display position of a specific image is not the position described in this characteristic part 005SG. For example, you may display in the position away from the movable body.

  In the feature portion 005SG, the first movable body 005SG301 moves rearward and downward from the intermediate position toward the close position, thereby approaching the decorative pattern displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C in the display area 5E. Although the form of displaying the cutting edge image 005SG002 that penetrates the decorative design as the specific image is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display that can be displayed by the display means is an effect other than the decorative design described above. It may be an image.

  In the feature portion 005SG, the lower portion of the first movable body 005SG301 approaches the display area 5E when the first movable body 005SG301 moves from the intermediate position to the close position. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of this, the display area 5E may be contacted. Alternatively, when the first movable body 005SG301 moves from the intermediate position to the close position, a separate movable body (for example, the second movable body 005SG401) or a transmissive member is provided between the first movable body 005SG301 and the display region 5E. The first movable body 005SG301 may be brought close to or in contact with the movable body.

  For example, an effect image imitating the first movable body 005SG301 or the second movable body 005SG401 may be used, or a character image may be used. Further, a hold storage image capable of displaying the hold storage, an active display image showing an active display area corresponding to the variable display, and the like may be used as the effect display. Furthermore, when the effect display is a hold storage display image or an active display image, the display mode of the hold storage display or the active display may be changed by operating the movable body so as to act on these images. Good.

  In the feature portion 005SG, in the first movable body effect, the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 is moved toward the display region 5E, and the first movable portion 005SG301A is moved by the image display device 5. The effect image 005SG004 for emphasis display is exemplified as a 3D image that can be stereoscopically viewed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special image that can be stereoscopically viewed is the first movable unit 005SG301A. For example, the edge image 005SG002 corresponding to the second movable portion 005SG301B may be displayed as a stereoscopically viewable 3D image. In addition, an image that does not correspond to the first movable body 005SG301 (for example, a background image) may be displayed as a special image that can be stereoscopically viewed.

  Further, in the feature portion 005SG, a form using a decorative design fragment image 005SG006 is exemplified as a special image having a shape imitating a small piece that can be stereoscopically viewed by the display means. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, an image simulating a glass piece when the image display device 5 is broken, or an image simulating a piece when the first movable body 005SG301 or the second movable body 005SG401 is broken can be displayed as a special image. It is good.

  In the feature unit 005SG, the second movable body effect is applied as the second effect in which the movable body performs the second motion different from the first motion in the second mode. However, the present invention is limited to this. If the second operation of the first movable body 005SG301 in the second movable body effect is an operation different from the first operation, for example, up, down, left and right along the display area 5E from the first origin position. This includes operations other than the operation of moving away from the display area 5E from the first origin position toward the first advanced position as described in the feature section 005SG.

  Further, in the feature unit 005SG, when the second movable body effect is executed during the super reach, the mode is controlled to the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than when the first movable body effect is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio of controlling to the big hit gaming state is different between when the first movable body effect is executed and when the second movable body effect is executed. For example, when the first movable body effect is executed during super reach, it may be controlled to the big hit gaming state at a higher rate than when the second movable body effect is executed.

  Further, in the feature portion 005SG, the form in which the big hit gaming state is applied as an advantageous state for the player is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous state for the player is a certain change state. Includes various gaming states such as a short-time state (high base state), a small hit gaming state, a small hit high probability state (KT state) in which a small hit frequently occurs and a game ball can be won at the big winning opening .

  In the feature section 005SG, the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect, which are examples of the first effect and the second effect, are selectively executed at a predetermined timing in one variable display period. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first movable body effect is executed at the first timing (for example, the weak SP reach development timing) in one variable display period, The second movable body effect may be executed at different second timings (for example, strong SP reach development timing, etc.). In addition, the first movable body effect is executed at a first timing over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a start timing of variable display before target variation), and a second timing different from the first timing (for example, start of target variation). The second movable body effect may be executed at the timing).

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 005SG, the form which set the 1st movable body effect and the 2nd movable body effect which are performed as an expansion effect performed in super reach as an example of a 1st effect and a 2nd effect is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect are set as effects to be executed in the look-ahead notice, the jackpot notice, the probable promotion effect, and the jackpot effect. May be.

  In the feature section 005SG, the development effect is exemplified as an effect suggesting whether to develop from super reach to weak super reach or strong super reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be executable at the timing of development from normal reach to super reach, or at the timing of development from weak super reach to strong super reach. That is, it may be executable at a plurality of timings during one variable display. Further, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made according to the occurrence of a start winning prize, and a pre-reading notice (such as a prelude effect) that enables execution of a suggestion effect according to the determination result over a plurality of variable displays can be executed. The development effect may be executable at a plurality of timings (for example, at the end or start of each variable display) in the plurality of variable displays.

  Further, in the feature unit 005SG, when the first movable body effect is executed as the development effect, it is easy to shift to the weak super reach after the development effect, and when the second movable body effect is executed, it is strong after the development effect. Although the form which is easy to shift to super reach has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and which of the first movable body effect and the second movable body effect is executed in the effect during reach Accordingly, the super-reach ratio that is controlled to the big hit gaming state higher than the normal reach may be different, or the special supermarket that is controlled to the big hit gaming state higher than the super reach. The rate at which reach is performed may be different.

(Explanation regarding feature 177SG)
FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area 177SG10 is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched and driven into the game area from a predetermined hitting ball emitting device. Further, the gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 177SG50 having a glass window 177SG50a so as to be rotatable about the left side, and the gaming area 177SG10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 177SG50. When the glass door frame 177SG50 is closed, the game area 177SG10 can be seen through the glass window 177SG50a.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the game board 2 is formed in a substantially square shape in front view with a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc., and obstructs the front of the game board surface. The board surface plate 2A is provided with nails (not shown), guide rails 177SG2b, and the like, and the spacer member 2B is integrally attached to the back side of the board surface plate 2A. Note that the game board 2 is configured in a substantially square shape in front view by a non-transparent member such as a plywood board, and is a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 177SG2b, etc. on the front game board surface. It may be configured.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 10A, on the right side of the game area), a variable display of special symbols (also called special figures) as special identification information of a plurality of types (also called special figure games). The first special symbol display device 177SG4A and the second special symbol display device 177SG4B are provided. These consist of 7-segment LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like, and special symbols may be numbers such as “0” to “9” or lighting patterns such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative design described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scroll-displayed or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 177SG4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5. Note that a frame-shaped center decorative frame 177SG51 is provided in the opening 177SG2c in the game board 2.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display. In the display area, a first hold display image (here, a circle image) corresponding to the first special figure game (variable display of decorative symbols) for which execution is suspended is displayed right-justified, and execution is suspended. A second reserved display image (here, a circle image) corresponding to the second special figure game (variable display of decorative symbols) is displayed in a left-justified manner.

  A first reserved storage display area 177SG5D and a second reserved storage display area 177SG5U are set at two locations on the left and right sides of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold memory display area 177SG5D and the second hold memory display area 177SG5U, a hold memory display for displaying the variable hold memory number (the special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special game is performed.

  Here, the suspension of the variable display corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 177SG6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 177SG6B. ) Is generated based on the starting prize. In other words, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the retained storage display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening is a round white display, and the second starting winning opening is Similarly, the stored storage display generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) is set to a round black display.

  In the following description, the first reserved storage display area 17′SG5D and the second reserved storage display area 177SG5U may be referred to as a reserved display area, and the number of reserved memories is the first reserved storage display area 177SG5D, the second reserved storage area. It can be recognized by the number of reserved storage displays displayed in the storage display area 177SG5U. Further, a display in which the hold storage display is gathered may be referred to as a hold display.

  The on-hold display in the first on-hold storage display area 177SG5D and the second on-hold storage display area 177SG5U is generated based on the start winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening, or the second The display mode (for example, display color or shape) may be varied depending on whether the game ball is generated based on the start winning by passing (entering) the game winning opening. In this embodiment, “execution” and “execution” are synonymous.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10A, the number of special figure reserved memories is displayed on the upper and lower parts of the first special symbol display device 177SG4A and the second special symbol display device 177SG4B together with the reserved memory display area. A first hold indicator 177SG25A and a second hold indicator 177SG25B are provided. The first hold indicator 177SG25A displays the first special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 177SG25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of memory in which the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure hold memory number is the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display holding memory number obtained by adding the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding memory number is also referred to as a total holding memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 177SG6A and a variable winning ball device 177SG6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 177SG6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball apparatus 177SG6B has a movable plate that has a movable plate that is changed between a closed state that is a first protruding position and an open state that is a retracted position by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 10-2) for the ordinary electric tool. And forming a second start winning opening. In the variable winning ball apparatus 177SG6B, for example, when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable plate protrudes toward the game area 177SG10 when the movable plate reaches the first projecting position, and the game ball enters the second start winning opening. It will be in the closed state which does not enter. On the other hand, the variable winning ball apparatus 177SG6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening when the movable plate is in the retracted position where the solenoid 81 is in the ON state. (It is also said that the second start winning opening is opened). When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started.

  Below the winning ball device 177SG6A and the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, a special variable winning ball device 177SG7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 177SG7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 10-2), and the special winning area as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 177SG7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 177SG7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big prize opening, and the game ball can easily enter the big prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including a general winning opening is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 177SG20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 10-1). As an example, the normal symbol display 177SG20 is made up of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating “0” to “9”, lighting patterns such as “−”, and the like. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 177SG41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 177SG41, the usual game is executed.

  On the right side of the normal symbol display 177SG20, there is provided a general symbol hold display 177SG25C. The usual figure hold display unit 177SG25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of usual figure holds stored, which is the number of usual figure games that are held pending, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  An effect device 177SG300 that operates according to the effect is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 10-2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 10-2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 177SG41, the normal game by the normal symbol display 177SG20 is started. In the case where the game ball has passed through the passing gate 177SG41 during the previous execution of the normal game, etc. (when the game ball has passed the pass gate 177SG41 but the normal game based on the pass cannot be immediately executed). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When it is “per hit,” the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 177SG6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 177SG6A, the first special game by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed, or a period in which it is controlled to a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state (described later) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 177SG7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state and the certainty change state continue until one of the end conditions is satisfied first, such as a specific number of special game runs and the next big hit game state being started. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy-low base state, and so on. The high-accuracy state and the low base state are also called high-accuracy low base states.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, or operating the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is provided as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that are not yet stopped when the decorative symbols that are stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described below. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined active lines in the decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of variable display of decorative symbols is “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 10-2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (a first special symbol display device 177SG4A, a second special symbol display device 177SG4B, a normal symbol display device 177SG20, and a first hold. And an output port for transmitting a signal (solenoid drive signal) for controlling (driving) the display 177SG25A, the second hold display 177SG25B, the universal hold display 177SG25C, and the like.

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), and a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big winning opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body of the effect device 177SG300, error notification, notification of power interruption recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body of the effect device 177SG300 to the movable body of the effect device 177SG300 or the drive circuit that drives the movable body of the effect device 177SG300.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  It should be noted that sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), control of the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300 (supply of signal for operating the movable body of the rendering device 177SG300, etc.) The control CPU 120 may execute it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Progress of games, progress of production, etc.)
A game medium (game ball) is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(Progress of games controlled by main board 11)
When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes through the passing gate 177SG41, a normal game (variable display of normal symbols) is started. In addition, when another general game is already running, or when the normal game cannot be started (such as when the start condition is not satisfied), such as during the following opening control, the maximum number of games is limited to 4 Execution is deferred. The held ordinary game is executed when a start condition for starting the ordinary game is satisfied (for example, no other ordinary game is being executed and no release control is being performed). If the game ball passes through the passing gate 177SG41 when the number of usual reserved memory reaches the upper limit, the number of ordinary reserved memory does not increase and the passage is invalidated.

  The variable display results that are stopped in the usual game include a symbol per figure (for example, a common figure such as “7”) and a common figure lost figure (for example, a common figure such as “−”). . When the symbol per symbol is stopped (derived), the variation display result is “per symbol”. When the usual figure losing symbol is stopped (derived), the change display result is “usual figure losing”.

  In the case of “per normal”, an opening control (the second start winning opening is opened) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the variable winning ball apparatus 177SG6B is tilted for a predetermined period. The opening control is not performed in the case of “ordinary loss”.

  When the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 177SG6A, the first special game is started. In addition, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, the second special game is started. When the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already being executed or the game is controlled to the big hit game state described later, each of the four special figure games is four. Execution of the special figure game is suspended with the above as an upper limit. The reserved special figure game is executed when a start condition capable of starting the special figure game is satisfied (other special figure games are not executed and are not in the big hit gaming state, etc.).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning opening when the first special figure reserved memory number reaches the upper limit value, the first special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated ( There may be a prize ball). When the game ball enters the second start winning opening when the second special figure reserved memory number reaches the upper limit value, the second special figure reserved memory number does not increase and the entry is invalidated ( There may be a prize ball).

  The entry (winning) of a game ball that increases the number of first special figure reserved memories into the first starting winning opening is also referred to as a first starting winning. The entry (winning) of the game ball that increases the second special figure reserved memory number into the second starting winning opening is also referred to as a second starting winning. These winnings are collectively referred to simply as starting winnings.

  The variation display result that is stopped and displayed in the special figure game includes a jackpot symbol (for example, a special symbol such as “3” and “7”) and a lost symbol (for example, a special symbol such as “−”). . The big hit symbol is stopped (derived) when the fluctuation display result is “big hit”. When the lost symbol is stopped (derived), the variation display result is “lost”.

  When the fluctuation display result of the first special figure game or the second special figure game is “big hit” (specific display result), the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. When the fluctuation display result is “losing”, it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 177SG7 is opened. The open state is until the earlier timing of an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). Will continue. Such an open state is called a round game (also simply called “round”). In the big hit game state, the round game is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15 times”) is reached (in the period other than the round game, the big prize opening is closed).

  In the “big hit”, the big hit types “non-probability change” and “probability change” are set. When the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit symbol “3” is stopped and displayed. When the big hit type is “probability change”, the big hit symbol of “7” is stopped and displayed.

  The “big hit” when the big hit type is “probable change” may be called “probable big hit”, and the “big hit” when the big hit type is “non-probable change” may be called “non-probable big hit”. In addition, the big hit gaming state based on “probability big hit” may be referred to as “probability big hit gaming state”. Further, the big hit gaming state based on the “non-probable big hit game” may be referred to as “non-probable big hit game state”.

  After the probable big hit game state is finished, the probability that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit probability) is controlled to be a probable state where the probability is higher than the normal state. The probability variation state continues until the next jackpot gaming state is started.

  After the probable big hit game state or the non-probable big hit game state ends, the average variable display time (variable display period) is controlled to be short when the normal state is shorter than the normal state. In the short-time state, one of the end conditions is established first when the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 177SG) or the next big hit game state is started. Continue until you do.

  In the short-time state, the variable winning ball device 177SG6B is in an open state and a closed state in an advantageous change mode in which a game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening compared to a non-short-time state that is not in a short time state such as a normal state. It may be changed to. For example, the control to make the change time of the normal symbol in the normal game (the variable variable display period of the normal figure, also called the normal figure change time) shorter than in the normal state, or the variable display in each normal game What is necessary is just to change the variable winning ball apparatus 177SG6B between the open state and the closed state in an advantageous change mode by, for example, control for improving the probability that the result will be “per hit” than in the normal state. Such control is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time reduction control” or “high base control”). By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a gaming state other than a state advantageous for a player such as a short-time state, a probability variation state, etc. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of “winning” and the probability that the variation display result in the special game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed) The state is controlled in the same manner as when a predetermined return process is not executed after the input.

  The short time state is also referred to as “high base”, and the gaming state that is not in the short time state is also referred to as “low base” or “non-short time state”. The probability variation state is also referred to as “high probability”, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is also referred to as “low probability”, “non-probability variation”, or the like.

(Progress of game controlled by production control board 12)
In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R provided in the image display device 5, this corresponds to the start of the first special game or the second special game. Then, variable display of decorative symbols (this is also a kind of effect) is started. At the timing when the variable display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special graphic game or the second special graphic game, the fixed decorative graphic (the variable display result) becomes the variable graphic display result (variable display result). A combination of three decorative symbols) is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative design (“reach variation” that is not yet stopped when the decorative design that is stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination described later. "Design" is also a display mode in which fluctuation continues.

  In addition, in this feature portion 177SG, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during variable display. As reach production, normal reach, super reach A, super reach B, super reach C, and super reach D having different production modes are prepared. In this feature 177SG, the big hit expectation is higher in the order of super reach D> super reach C> super reach B> super reach A> normal reach.

  The big hit expectation is, for example, the ratio at which the variation display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, and is also the ratio at which the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “hit”.

  When the fluctuation display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol. (The display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7” for non-probable big hit, non-probable big hit, on the predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R. "6" etc.) are all displayed at the same time.

  When the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern. There is. In addition, when the variable display result is “losing”, after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss combination”) that is not the big hit combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative design. ”) May be stopped and displayed.

  The effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing various effects related to the game such as decorative pattern change display control and notice effect based on the effect control command (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. .

  Note that the announcement control executed by the production control CPU 120 during the variable display of decorative symbols includes, for example, a jackpot announcement effect that suggests the possibility of a big hit, a reach announcement that suggests whether or not to reach, and a stop symbol Multiple notices that are executed at the start of variable display or when reach is established, such as a stop symbol notice to notify, a latent notice to notify whether or not the game state is a probability variation state (whether it is latent or not) Including.

  Further, in this feature section 177SG, as various effects including the above notice, a movable body effect by the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R of the effect device 177SG300 and a combined effect by the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 can be executed. . These various effects are executed, for example, at a predetermined timing during variable display, or at a timing when the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In the feature section 177SG, an effect using the effect device 177SG300 is executed when super reach is executed (details will be described later).

(Director 177SG300)
Next, details of the rendering device 177SG300 will be described based on FIGS. 10-3 to 10-15. 10C is a front view illustrating a state where the movable body of the effect device is in the first position, and FIG. 10B is a front view illustrating the state where the movable body of the effect device is in the second position. FIG. 10-4 is an exploded perspective view illustrating a state in which the structure of the effect device is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 10-5 is an exploded perspective view illustrating a state of the structure of the effect device as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 10-6 is an exploded perspective view illustrating a state in which the structure of the movable body is viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 10-7 is an exploded perspective view illustrating a state in which the structure of the movable body is viewed obliquely from behind. 10A is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the rotating unit is in the first protruding position, and FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram illustrating a state in which the rotating unit is in the storage position. FIG. 10-9 is a fragmentary sectional view showing the structure of the lower part of the movable body. 10A is an exploded perspective view illustrating the structure of the first drive mechanism, and FIG. 10B is a plan view illustrating the guided member. FIG. 10-11 is a plan view illustrating a relationship among the guide groove, the guided member, and the moving body. FIGS. 10-12 is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of a to-be-guided member and a movable part (A)-(E). FIGS. 10-13 is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of a to-be-guided member and a movable part (F)-(J). 10A to 14C are schematic explanatory views showing the relationship between the movable body and the image display device. FIGS. 10-15 is explanatory drawing which shows the state which (A) has a movable body in a lowered position, and (B) has the state in a raised position. FIGS. A16 to (F) are explanatory diagrams illustrating an example of an operation mode of the movable body in super reach.

  In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear. Further, the description will be made with reference to the vertical and horizontal directions as viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-3 to 10-5, the rendering device 177SG300 is provided with a base frame 177SG301 formed in a square frame shape in front view, and movable in the left-right direction and the vertical direction with respect to the base frame 177SG301. Movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R, a first drive mechanism 177SG303 that moves the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R in the left-right direction, and a second drive mechanism 177SG304 that moves the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R in the up-down direction. The image display device 5 can be visually recognized through the opening of the base frame 177SG301. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are in contact with each other as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B). It can move in the left-right direction between the second position (also referred to as the combined position) and the second position, and in the second position, the lowered position shown in FIG. It is possible to move up and down between the ascending position shown and to change the orientation (posture) at a third position between the first position and the second position.

  Next, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7. Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are formed symmetrically and have substantially the same configuration, the left movable body 177SG302L will be described below, and the description of the right movable body 177SG302R will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7, the movable body 177SG302L is movable in the left-right direction by the first driving mechanism 177SG303 and is provided in a non-rotatable manner, and at a position below the movable body 177SG310. Guided member 177SG320 to be moved and guided by guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R, which will be described later, and can be rotated together with guided member 177SG320 at a position above movable body 177SG310, and in the vertical direction with respect to movable body 177SG310 and guided member 177SG320. And a movable portion 177SG330 that is movably provided.

  The movable portion 177SG330 is pivotable about a pedestal 177SG331 attached to the upper end of a rotating shaft 177SG311 that vertically penetrates the moving body 177SG310, and a guide rod 177SG337 described later above the pedestal 177SG331, and is movable in the vertical direction. Rotating base 177SG332 provided, front cover 177SG333 covering the front side of rotating base 177SG332, rear cover 177SG334 covering the back side of rotating base 177SG332, and rotating base 177SG332 up and down. Rotating member 177SG335 provided on the main body.

  A guide rod 177SG337 that is directed upward and downward is erected on the upper left front corner portion of the pedestal 177SG331 so that the rotation base 177SG332 is guided so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the upper right rear of the pedestal 177SG331. An anti-rotation member 177SG336 for restricting the rotation about the guide rod 177SG337 is provided upright at the corner. The rotation stop member 177SG336 has a length that allows the rotation base 177SG332 to regulate rotation between a lowered position and a raised position, which will be described later.

  An LED board 177SG339 on which a plurality of movable LEDs 177SG338F are mounted on the front surface so as to be able to irradiate light is attached to the front upper portion of the rotation base 177SG332, and the movable LED 177SG338F emits light by emitting light. Light is emitted outward through a transparent lens portion 177SG340F formed on the front cover 177SG333. Further, although not particularly shown, a plurality of movable LEDs 177SG338B are mounted on the back surface of the LED substrate 177SG339 so as to be able to irradiate light forward, and the movable LED 177SG338B emits light, so that the light from the movable LED 177SG338B is covered by the back cover. The light is emitted outward through the transparent lens portion 177SG340B formed in 177SG334.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-6 to 10-8, a first rotating shaft 177 SG 360 that faces in the front-rear direction protrudes from the front lower portion of the rotating base 177 SG 332, and the first rotating shaft 177 SG 360 is provided on the first rotating shaft 177 SG 360. The first link member 177SG361 whose one end is pivotally supported by the first shaft portion of the rotation member 177SG335 via the pivot 177SG364 is pivotally supported. In addition, a second rotation shaft 177SG362 protrudes below the first rotation shaft 177SG360 on the front surface of the rotation base 177SG332, and one end of the second rotation shaft 177SG362 is the first of the rotation member 177SG335. A second link member 177SG363 pivotally supported by the two shaft portions via a pivot 177SG365 is pivotally supported.

  An arcuate gear portion 177SG366 is formed on a part of the peripheral edge of the second rotation shaft 177SG362 in the second link member 177SG363, and the gear portion 177SG366 is for rotation fixed to the back surface of the rotation base 177SG332. A drive gear 177SG368 fixed to the drive shaft of the motor 177SG367 is engaged.

  As shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the rotating member 177SG335 has a first protruding position (origin position) that protrudes downward to the right with respect to the rotating base 177SG332, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B). , Retracted from the first protruding position to the rotation base 177SG332 side, and a housing position (see FIG. 10-8 (B)) where a part is accommodated between the rotation base 177SG332 and the front cover 177SG333 It is provided so as to be rotatable. Further, a second protruding position (see FIG. 10-3 (B)) that protrudes to the upper right side with respect to the rotation base 177SG332 between the first protruding position (origin position, see FIG. 10-3 (A)) and the storage position. ) Can also be stopped.

  Specifically, in the first projecting position shown in FIG. 10-8 (A), the upper portion of the second link member 177SG363 slightly tilts to the left and comes into contact with a boss 177SG369 projecting from the rotation base 177SG332 to counterclockwise. The downward rotation of the rotation member 177SG335 is restricted by the rotation of the rotation being restricted. Here, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (B), when the drive gear 177SG368 is rotated by the rotation motor 177SG367, the second link member 177SG363 is rotated clockwise and the pivot 177SG365 is rotated second. The first link member 177SG361 rotates counterclockwise and the pivot 177SG364 moves in an arc around the first rotation shaft 177SG360, while moving in an arc shape around the shaft 177SG362. The member 177SG335 rotates from the first protruding position toward the storage position. Thus, two places are pivotally supported by the two first link members 177SG361 and the second link member 177SG363, so that it can be rotated more compactly than rotating around one axis.

  At the upper end of the front cover 177SG333, there are fixed rails 177SG350L and 177SG350R (see FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4) extending in the left-right direction on the upper side of the base frame 177SG301, and between these fixed rails 177SG350L and 177SG350R. A guide portion 177SG342 that is guided to move in the left-right direction by a movable rail 177SG351 that is movably provided in the up-down direction is attached to the rotation base 177SG332 so as to be rotatable about a shaft portion 177SG343 that faces in the up-down direction.

  As described above, the movable portion 177SG330 is configured such that the front cover 177SG333 and the rear cover 177SG334 are attached to and integrated with the front and rear surfaces of the rotation base 177SG332, and the movable base portion 177SG330A is vertically moved with respect to the movable base portion 177SG330A. A rotating portion 177SG330B formed of a rotating member 177SG335 provided to be rotatable in a direction, and the rotating portion 177SG330B is in the first protruding position or the second protruding position, and the rotating portion 177SG330B is It can change to the 2nd state in a storage position.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the movable base 177SG330A has a half of the aircraft body, the rotating portion 177SG330B has a shape imitating a blade, the movable 177SG302L has the right half of the aircraft, and the movable 177SG302R has It is considered as a model that forms the left half of the airplane. On the other hand, frame covers 177SG370L and 177SG370R imitating half of an airplane having translucent lens portions 177SG371L and 177SG371R are attached to the left and right sides of the base frame 177SG301, respectively.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are in the first position, the front half 177SG333 and the frame body cover 177SG370L of the left movable body 177SG302L are imitated. One first left effect portion is formed, and one front right effect portion simulating the left half of the airplane is formed by the front cover 177SG333 and the frame cover 177SG370R of the right movable body 177SG302R.

  10B, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are in the second position, the rear cover 177SG334 of the left movable body 177SG302L and the rear cover 177SG334 of the right movable body 177SG302R are moved to the left and right. By arranging and uniting in parallel, one second rendering unit simulating the entire airplane is formed.

  In addition, a part of the first left effect part and the first right effect part includes a light transmission lens part 177SG340F of the front cover 177SG333 imitating a half of the cockpit and a light transmission lens part 177SG371L, 177SG371R of the frame cover 177SG370L, 177SG370R. Constitutes one first light emitting part, and part of the second effect part comprises one second light emitting part by left and right translucent lens parts 177SG340B and 177SG340B imitating half of the cockpit of the rear cover 177SG334. The

  As shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10 (A), the movable body 177SG310 has a vertical hole 177SG312 penetrating in the vertical direction, and the rotary shaft 177SG311 is rotatably inserted into the vertical hole 177SG312. Has been. The upper part of the rotating shaft 177SG311 is fitted in a shaft hole 177SG313 formed in the base 177SG331 so as not to rotate. Further, a horizontal hole 177SG314 penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in the moving body 177SG310 so as not to intersect with the vertical hole 177SG312. A rotary shaft 177SG311 is rotatably inserted into the vertical hole 177SG312.

  The rotation shaft 177SG311 has an upper portion that is non-rotatably fitted in a shaft hole 177SG313 formed in the base 177SG331, and a lower portion that is non-rotatably fitted in the shaft hole 177SG321 of the guided member 177SG320. That is, since the movable portion 177SG330 and the guided member 177SG320 are integrated via the rotating shaft 177SG311, the guided member 177SG320 constitutes a part of the movable portion 177SG330.

  As shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), the guided member 177SG320 is formed of a disk-shaped member centered on a circular shaft hole 177SG321. Contact recesses 177SG322A and 177SG322B capable of accommodating contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B, which will be described later, are formed at two positions on the right side of the peripheral wall with an interval of about 90 degrees, and a locking recess 177SG323 is formed on the left side of the peripheral wall. Is formed. In addition, the peripheral wall 177SG322C on the rear side of the contact recess 177SG322A and the peripheral wall 177SG322D on the front side of the contact recess 177SG322B are outward from an arc centered on the shaft hole 177SG321 (see the dashed line in FIG. 10-10 (B)). The peripheral walls 177SG322E and 177SG322F extending linearly from the front ends of the peripheral walls 177SG322C and 177SG322D to the left are substantially parallel to each other. In other words, rotation restricting portions 177SG325A and 177SG325 projecting outward from the arc centered on the shaft hole 177SG321 are formed at the distal ends of the peripheral walls 177SG322C and 177SG322E and the distal ends of the peripheral walls 177SG322D and 177SG322F. The guide member 177SG320 is formed in a non-circular shape.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-10 to 10-13, linear guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R for moving and guiding the moving body 177SG310 in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the member constituting the lower side of the base frame 177SG301. Has been. Specifically, the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R are formed in a groove shape opened upward in the longitudinal sectional view by the bottom wall 177SG381, the front wall 177SG382, and the rear wall 177SG383, and the guided member 177SG320 is provided to be movable in the left-right direction. It has been. The front-rear dimension L1 of the guide grooves 177SG380L, 177SG380R is slightly longer than the diameter 2R of the guided member 177SG320, and is shorter than the dimension L2 passing through the top and center of the rotation restricting portions 177SG325A, 177SG325 in the guided member 177SG320. (2R <L1 <L2).

  At the left and right ends of each of the guide grooves 177SG380L, 177SG380R, a movable gear 177SG302L, 177SG302R is movable to a transmission gear group 177SG392R that is locked to the locking recess 177SG323 of the guided member 177SG320, and movable A locking piece 177SG324B that is locked to the locking recess 177SG323 of the guided member 177SG320 when the bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are positioned at the second position, and the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R first position and The rotation at the second position is restricted.

  Cylindrical abutting bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B are erected at a substantially central position in the longitudinal direction of the bottom wall 177SG381 at a position in the vicinity of the rear wall 177SG383 and separated from each other by a predetermined dimension. Further, the portions corresponding to each of the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B in the rear wall 177SG383 are swelled to the rear side, and can accommodate the rotation restricting portions 177SG325A and 177SG325 when the guided member 177SG320 rotates as will be described later. Recesses 177SG386A and 177SG386B are formed inside. A bearing portion 177SG387 is formed between the left and right guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R.

  The first drive mechanism 177SG303 includes drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R for moving the moving body 177SG310, movement motors 117SG391L and 117SG391R for rotating the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R around the axis, and movement motors 117SG391L, The transmission gear groups 177SG392L and 177SG392R are mainly composed of a plurality of driven gears that transmit the power of 117SG391R to the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R.

  The first drive mechanism 117SG303 includes an origin detection sensor 177SG401 that can detect that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position (first position), and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at the combined position (second position). A coalescence detection sensor 177SG402 that can detect that it is disposed at the position) is provided, and the origin detection sensor 177SG401 and the coalescence detection sensor 177SG402 are connected to the effect control board 12.

  The drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R extend in the left-right direction so as to extend above the front wall 177SG382, one end is pivotally supported by the center bearing portion 177SG387, and the other end is pivoted to the left and right portions of the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R. It is supported. A movable body 177SG310 is inserted into the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R via a lateral hole 177SG314, and a concave groove 177SG390A spirally formed on the peripheral surface of the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R has an inner periphery of the lateral hole 177SG314. A locking portion 177SG315 protruding from the surface is slidably locked. Therefore, in the moving body 177SG310, the guided member 177SG320 coupled via the rotation shaft 177SG311 is guided by the guide grooves 177SG380L and 177SG380R so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and the rotation about the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R is restricted. Therefore, the drive shafts 177SG390L and 177SG390R move in the left-right direction by rotating.

  Next, operation modes of the first drive mechanism 177SG303 and the movable body 177SG302L will be described based on FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13. Note that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are bilaterally symmetric and have almost the same operation mode. Therefore, only the operation mode of the movable body 177SG302L will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A), when the movable body 177SG302L is in the first position, the guided member 177SG320 is in a state where the transmission gear group 177SG392R is locked to the locking recess 177SG323 at the left end of the guide groove 177SG380L. Is maintained at. At this time, in the movable portion 177SG330, the front cover 177SG333 faces the front, and the rotating portion 177SG330B is located at the first protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B), the driving shaft 177SG390L is rotated by the moving motor 117SG391L, so that the moving body 177SG310 moves toward the right side. At this time, rotation of the guided member 177SG320 around the rotation shaft 177SG311 is restricted by the peripheral wall 177SG322E approaching substantially parallel to the front wall 177SG382 and the peripheral wall 177SG322F approaching substantially parallel to the rear wall 177SG383. Therefore, the movable part 177SG330 moves to the right without changing the direction. And when it moves to the 3rd position between the 1st position and the 2nd position, peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts boss 177SG385A for contact.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (C) and 10-12 (D), the contact boss 177SG385A is disposed at a position shifted backward from the movement locus of the rotation shaft 177SG311 which is the center of the guided member 177SG320. Therefore, when the movable body 177SG310 continues to move in the right direction, when the peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A at the third position, the movable body 177SG310 moves to the right while maintaining the corresponding contact state. As a result, the guided member 177SG320 rotates counterclockwise around the contact boss 177SG385A. Further, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 10-12 (C), the leading end of the rotation restricting portion 177SG325A is accommodated in the accommodating recess 177SG386A, so that the rotation of the guided member 177SG320 in the guide groove 177SG380L is allowed. . Further, with the rotation of the guided member 177SG320, the contact boss 177SG385A is accommodated in the contact recess 177SG322A.

  As shown in FIG. 10-12 (E), when the guided member 177SG320 rotates about 90 degrees after the peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A, the peripheral wall 177SG322C contacts the contact boss 177SG385A. The peripheral wall 177SG322D of the contact recess 177SG322B contacts the contact boss 177SG385B.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 (F) to 10-13 (H), the movable body 177SG310 continues to move in the right direction so that the peripheral wall 177SG322C is in contact with the contact boss 177SG385A. Although released, the guided member 177SG320 rotates counterclockwise around the contact boss 177SG385B by continuing to move to the right while the peripheral wall 177SG322D is in contact with the contact boss 177SG385B. To go. Further, as shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 10-13 (H), the leading end of the rotation restricting portion 177SG325B is accommodated in the accommodating recess 177SG386B, so that the guided member 177SG320 is allowed to rotate. Further, with the rotation of the guided member 177SG320, the contact boss 177SG385B is accommodated in the contact recess 177SG322B.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (I), with the rotation of the guided member 177SG320 by about 180 degrees, the movable portion 177SG330 integrated with the guided member 177SG320 is about 180 degrees around the rotation shaft 177SG311. The direction (posture) is changed by rotating. Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-12 (B) to 10-13 (I), the two abutting bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B are arranged apart from each other in the moving direction of the movable body 177SG302L, and the peripheral wall 177SG322C is for abutting. The state of being in contact with the boss 177SG385A is released and the peripheral wall 177SG322D is in contact with the contact boss 177SG385B, so that the rotation is continued.

  As shown in FIG. 10-13 (J), after the contact state of the peripheral wall 177SG322D from the contact boss 177SG385B is released, the peripheral wall 177SG322D moves to the right without changing its orientation. At this time, rotation of the guided member 177SG320 around the rotation shaft 177SG311 is restricted by the peripheral wall 177SG322F approaching substantially parallel to the front wall 177SG382 and the peripheral wall 177SG322E approaching substantially parallel to the rear wall 177SG383. Therefore, the movable part 177SG330 moves to the right without changing the direction. When the movable body 177SG302L reaches the second position, the guided member 177SG320 is maintained in a state where the locking piece 177SG324B is locked to the locking recess 177SG323 at the right end of the guide groove 177SG380L. At this time, in the movable portion 177SG330, the rear cover 177SG334 faces forward, and the rotating portion 177SG330B is located at the storage position.

  Although details of the operation mode when the movable body 177SG302L moves from the second position to the first position are omitted, the direction is changed by rotating in the opposite direction to that when moving from the first position to the second position. It will be.

  As described above, the movable body 177SG302L comes into contact when it comes into contact with the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B at the third position from the first position to the second position or from the second position to the first position. The guided member 177SG320 rotates about 180 degrees by continuing to move to the right or left while maintaining the state, so that the direction (posture) of the movable portion 177SG330 changes from the front (first posture) to the rear (second posture). ) To change.

  Next, the positional relationship between the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, the image display device 5, and the game board 2 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 10-14 (A), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are in the first position, the rotating portion 177SG330B is in the first protruding position. The separation dimension L3 from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the display screen of the image display device 5 is shorter than the length dimension L4 from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the tip of the rotation unit 177SG330B at the first protruding position (L3 < L4) When the movable portion 177SG330 tries to rotate at the third position while the rotating portion 177SG330B protrudes to the first protruding position, the rotating portion 177SG330B comes into contact with the display screen of the image display device 5. End up.

  Further, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are in the second position, the rotating portion 177SG330B is in the second protruding position. The separation dimension L3 from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the display screen of the image display device 5 is shorter than the length dimension L5 from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the tip of the rotation unit 177SG330B at the second protruding position (L3 < L5) When the movable portion 177SG330 tries to rotate at the third position while the rotating portion 177SG330B protrudes to the second protruding position, the rotating portion 177SG330B comes into contact with the display screen of the image display device 5. End up.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (C), before the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate, that is, before reaching the third position, the rotating portion 177SG330B is moved to the first protruding position or the second protruding position. The distance L3 from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the display screen of the image display device 5 is changed from the rotation shaft 177SG311 to the storage position by moving the movable portion 177SG330 from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the rotation unit 177SG330B is prevented from coming into contact with the display screen of the image display device 5 when rotating, since the length L6 is longer than the length L6 up to the tip of the rotation unit 177SG330B (L3> L6). The

  Next, the second drive mechanism 177SG304 will be described based on FIGS. 10-4, 10-5, and 10-15. As shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, the second drive mechanism 177SG304 includes an elevating motor 177SG305 fixed to an attachment member 177SG308 attached to the upper side rear surface of the base frame 177SG301, and an elevating motor 177SG305. A driven gear 177SG306 that meshes with the drive gear 177SG305A, and a connecting elongated hole 177SG307A into which one end of the driven gear 177SG306 is pivotally supported by the mounting member 177SG308 and a connecting shaft 177SG306A projecting near the periphery of the front surface of the driven gear 177SG306 is inserted. And a lifting arm 177SG307 on which a movable rail 177SG351 is pivotally supported.

  The movable rail 177SG351 is inserted into a pair of left and right lifting guides 177SG353 and 177SG353 in the vertical direction formed on the upper side of the base frame 177SG301 by guide rollers 177SG352 and 177SG352 provided on the left and right sides of the back surface. Guided. In addition, a long hole 177SG354 is formed between the lifting guides 177SG353 and 177SG353 so as to pass through the connecting shaft between the tip of the lifting arm 177SG307 and the movable rail 177SG351. In the second drive mechanism 177SG304 configured as described above, the movable rail 177SG351 moves in the vertical direction when the lifting arm 177SG307 rotates around one end by the lifting motor 177SG305.

  Next, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment will be described. A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 10-16 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 10-16 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 177SG4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 177SG4B. Command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R in response to the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variation display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variation display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), a determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”, or a variable display result is displayed. Different EXT data is set in accordance with a determination result (a jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of types of jackpot types in the case of “big hit”.

  In the variation display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variation display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variation display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable big hit A”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable big hit B”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable variable big hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the decoration symbol change stop (determination) in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, and 177SG5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time shortening control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is performed by the time shortening control. On the other hand, a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, short time state) in which probability variation control is not performed is used. In addition, the command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (high probability low base state, timeless probability variation state) in which probability variation control is performed while time variation control is not performed, and command 9503H is probability variation and time variation control. It is assumed that the fourth gaming state designation command corresponds to the gaming state in which the control is performed together (highly accurate high base state, time-varying probability changing state).

  The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big prize opening notifying that it is a period in which the big prize opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. Command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  In the jackpot start designation command or jackpot end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the jackpot type decision result. . Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command or jackpot end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening big hit state or the short-term opening big hit state (for example, “1” to “16”). Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 177SG6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 177SG4A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 177SG6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. The second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified in the second reserved memory display area 5U or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved memory number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  FIG. 10-17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the feature section 177SG of the present embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and a variation pattern determination The numerical data indicating the random number MR3 and the random number MR4 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and updates various numerical data by software so that one of the random values MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the fluctuation display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65536”. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is used to determine the big hit type as “probable big hit A”, “probable big hit B”, or “non-probable” when the variation display result is “big hit”. It is a random value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”.

  The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the fluctuation display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "missing the normal figure". For example, a value in the range of “3” to “13”.

  FIG. 10-18 illustrates a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment. In the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is “losing”, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. Also, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the variation display result is “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variation display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach lose variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  For the big hit fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern, the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach of normal reach is executed, and the super reach in which the reach of super reach such as Super Reach A, Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach D is executed. There are fluctuation patterns. In the feature 177SG of the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as with super reach, normal reach A, normal reach B,... As described above, a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, the super reach variation pattern may be provided with five or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach E, super reach F,.

  As shown in FIG. 10-18, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic unit 177SG of the present embodiment is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation pattern. Moreover, the super reach production of the super reach D is executed with respect to the special figure change time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach reach production such as the super reach A to the super reach D in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment is executed. The fluctuation pattern is set to have the longest special figure fluctuation time, and then the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of the super reach C is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of the super reach B is executed, and super reach A The special figure variation time is set longer in the order of the variation pattern in which the super reach production is executed.

  Note that the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment is set so that the big hit expectation degree in which the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach D, super reach C, super reach B, super reach A, and normal reach is set higher. Therefore, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the big hit expectation is higher as the variation time is longer.

  In the feature 177SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are classified into the variation pattern types such as the non-reach type, the normal reach type, and the super reach type. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination first, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and these variations are determined. The variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after first determining the variation pattern type from the random number for pattern type determination It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  It should be noted that the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of Super Reach C is executed and the change pattern in which the super reach effect of Super Reach D is executed in the feature 177SG of the present embodiment are both movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. Is a variation pattern that moves (moves) from the origin position toward the coalescing position, but the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of Super Reach C is executed may be selected only during the short-time control (high base). On the other hand, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach D is executed is a variation pattern that may be selected regardless of whether or not the time reduction control is being performed.

  Further, the variation pattern of super reach C is a variation pattern in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position toward the combined position while the push button 31B is operated, while the variation pattern of super reach D is This is a variation pattern in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position toward the combined position regardless of the operation of the push button 31B (see FIG. 10-28). In the feature 177SG of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the super reach C is exemplified only during the time-shortening control (high base), but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the variation pattern of the super reach C may be selected during the normal state (low base).

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-18, when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach D is executed, the change display result is lost. However, in other words, the variation display result is always a big hit when the variation display is performed in the variation pattern in which the super reach production of the super reach D is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be provided a case in which the fluctuation display result is lost even when the fluctuation display is executed in the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach D is executed. .

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 has a plurality of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a plurality of variation patterns as shown in FIG. 10-18. Table data constituting a variation pattern table for storing types is stored.

  FIG. 10-19 illustrates a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the feature unit 177SG of the present embodiment, the common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

  The display result determination table is determined to be a variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 177SG4B. Before the special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the fluctuation display result as “big hit” based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. It is a table.

  In the display result determination table of the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short time state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “losing”.

  In the display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result as to whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as the big hit gaming state. It is data for determination to be assigned. In the display result determination table of the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). , “Big hit” is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as the “big hit” in the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) to control the big hit gaming state. Then, compared to the determined probability (about 1/300 in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment), the probability of being determined to control the big hit gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit” is increased (this embodiment In the feature 177SG of the form, about 1/30). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), there is a probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state as compared to the normal state or the short time state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state so as to increase.

  10-20 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In the jackpot type determination table of the feature 177SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol on which the variable display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol) Depending on whether it is a special game by the symbol display device 177SG4B), the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change big hit A”, “probability big hit B” Are assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types.

  Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 177SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 10-20 (B). In the feature portion 177SG of the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state ends as the jackpot type. Probability control big hit A and probability change big hit B that execute high-accuracy control and short-time control are executed and shift to high accuracy high-base state, and after completion of big hit gaming state, only time-short control is executed and shift to low accuracy high-base state Non-probable big hit is set.

  In the big hit gaming state with “probable big hit A” and the big hit gaming state with “non-probable big hit”, as described above, there are 16 rounds of changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 177SG7 to the first state advantageous to the player (so-called 16 rounds), which is a recurring normally open jackpot. On the other hand, in the big hit gaming state with “probable big hit B”, as described above, the round in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 177SG7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds). It is a short-term open jackpot. Therefore, “probability variation big hit A” may be referred to as 16 rounds (16R) probability variation big hit, and “probability variation big hit B” may be referred to as five rounds (5R) probability variation big hit.

  The high-accuracy control and the time-shortening control executed after the end of the big hit gaming state of the probability changing big hit A and the probability changing big hit B are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that has occurred again is the probable big hit A or the probable big hit B, the high-precision control and the short-time control are executed again after the big hit gaming state ends, so the big hit gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive resort state that occurs continuously.

  On the other hand, the time-shortening control that is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state due to “non-probable big hit” is that a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment) or the predetermined control. The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the special game of the number of times is executed.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 10-20 (A), “probable big hit A” and “probable big hit B” depending on whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure. The judgment value allocation to the jackpot type is different. That is, when the variation special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of “81” to “100”) are assigned to the big hit type of “probability big hit B” with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variation special chart is the second special chart, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probable big hit B”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 177SG4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 177SG4B is satisfied. Thus, the ratio of determining the big hit type as “probability big hit B” with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the big hit type is “probable big hit B” and the short open big hit state with a small number of rounds is controlled. In the gaming state where the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of short-term open big hit state with few obtained prize balls. It can be prevented.

  In addition, in the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 10-20 (A), the decision value is assigned to the big hit type of “non-probable change” according to whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether or not there is, the probability that it is a jackpot of non-probability change and the probability that it will be a jackpot of probability change are the same regardless of whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure It is said that.

  Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the determination value to “probability variation big hit B” differs depending on whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure, and “probability big hit A” The allocation of the judgment value for "" varies depending on whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability big hit A" with many rounds, the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure. It is set so that it is easier to determine the case of the case than the case of the first special figure.

  Even when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a determination value in a predetermined range different from the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of “probability big hit B”. May be. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller determination value may be assigned to the big hit type of “probability big hit B” than when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the special figure display result is “big hit”, and the special figure display result is “lost”. A variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance is prepared in advance.

  In the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation pattern for normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern for super reach A big hit (PB1-2), the fluctuation pattern for super reach B big hit (PB1-3), and super reach D For each variation pattern of the big hit variation pattern (PB1-5), a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. In the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation pattern for the normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern for the super reach A big hit (PB1-2), the fluctuation pattern for the super reach B big hit (PB1-3), and the time-shortening control. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-4) corresponding to the super reach C big hit, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. In the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, when the determination value of the big hit is “probable big hit A” or “probable big hit B”, the super reach B is easy to be determined. In the case of “non-probable big hit”, since the super reach A is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B is executed, “probable big hit A” or “probable big hit B”. It can increase the player's expectation that it will be.

  Further, the loss variation pattern determination table is used when the loss variation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less and when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4. Loss variation pattern determination table B, loss variation pattern determination table C used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8, and when the gaming state is a high base state in which time-shortening control is performed A variation pattern determination table D for loss used in the above is prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach A loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern (PA2-3) of B loss within a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. Also, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved memories of 2 to 4. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern determining random value MR3 for a variation pattern (PA2-2) of A loss and a variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach B loss. ing. Also, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total reserved memory number of 5 to 8. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern determining random value MR3 for a variation pattern (PA2-2) of A loss and a variation pattern (PA2-3) of super reach B loss. ing. In the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of the super reach A loss ( PA2-2), the variation pattern of the super reach B loss (PA2-3), and the variation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach C loss are predetermined disturbances within a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 10-18, the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further the variation pattern (PA1). The non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter variation time than -2). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, a non-reach loss variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, a winning prize makes it difficult to generate a useless starting prize that is not reserved, and when the number of reserved words decreases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening with a long fluctuation time ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed by increasing the time of the variable display.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-21 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 first clears the RAM area, sets various initial values, and performs initial setting of a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms). A first initialization process (177SGS050) and a second initialization process (177SGS051) for returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to their origin positions and confirming the operation are performed, and the processes of S73 to S77 shown in FIG. 6 are performed. Execute.

  Here, the second initialization process will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23. FIG. 10-22 is a schematic explanatory diagram illustrating operation modes of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. FIGS. 10-23 are explanatory diagrams showing the control speed in the actual operation check operation control, FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the detection-time operation control, and FIG. 10C is the non-detection-time operation control. It is explanatory drawing which shows control speed.

  As shown in FIG. 10-22, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between the origin position (first position) and the merge position (second position), respectively. The forward movement to the (second position) and the return movement from the combined position to the origin position are performed by the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R by the effect control CPU 120 executing the effect actor operation processing and the effect agent storage processing described later. This is an actual operation mode.

  When the second initialization process is executed, the production control CPU 120 does not detect the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, that is, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 have some reason (for example, conveyance or If it has moved from the origin position when installed on the amusement island, or if it could not return to the original position during the previous operation (for example, the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302 due to motor step-out, failure, catching, etc. during the performance) (Such as when a movable body error (operational abnormality) such as failure to confirm or return to origin) occurs) When not detected in Fig. 10-22 Such as the position indicated by a black circle corresponding to create control, when in position) between the home position and united position, perform a non-detection operation control for homing. When this non-detection operation control is executed, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are located away from the origin position, and therefore, the operation is only an operation of moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 in the direction of the origin position.

  In addition, when the second initialization process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes the detection-time operation control when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401.

  For example, in order for the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 to be reliably detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, from the time when the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 to the origin position direction of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302. In a case where a predetermined operable range (for example, play) is set before the operation is restricted, the origin is returned and the position is further shifted from the position detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. May stop in position. Therefore, even when the detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control during detection for returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 to a more accurate origin position is performed.

  In this detection operation control, it is necessary to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 to a position away from the origin position and then return to the origin position in order to temporarily cancel the detection state of the detected part by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Since it is not necessary to move to the combined position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position to the operation position at the time of detection near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the second initialization process, and then executes the actual operation confirmation operation control. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same operation as the actual operation actually performed in an effect using the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R (movable body effect described later).

  Next, the control speeds set when the performance control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control are compared. Note that the speeds shown in FIGS. 10-23 (A), 10-23 (B), and 10-23 (C) are controlled by the effect control CPU 120 to operate the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. The speed is different from the actual operation speed of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, even when the same control speed is set in one movement section and another movement section between the origin position and the combined position, one movement section And the other moving sections (for example, a section with and without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), and when moving up and down in the same moving section, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. The operating speed when actually operating may be different from the control speed. Further, even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, if there is a difference in the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each movable body 177SG302L and 177SG302R, each movable body 177SG302L , 177SG302R does not necessarily have the same actual operation speed. In the case where a plurality of movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 177SG302L and 177SG302R, the size, weight, and the like of each movable body 177SG302L and 177SG302R When there is a difference in the operation mode, the operation distance, the drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 10-23 (A), when performing the actual operation check operation control, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation check process timer in the set actual operation check process data. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate to stop at the coalescence position, and to accelerate from the coalescence position and then decelerate to stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R can operate normally, a speed priority mode (moving motor 177SG391L, which will be described later) is set between the origin position and the combined position. As a mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be moved at a high speed (maximum speed) instead of a small torque of the 177SG391R (see FIG. 10-27), the control speeds of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are set in the order of low speed → high speed → low speed Change. That is, when the production control CPU 120 executes the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed that is faster than the minimum speed. In order to control each movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R to operate at a speed within the range of (high speed), even when the actual operation check operation control is executed, the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed is Control is performed so that each movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R operates at a speed within a range of a maximum speed (high speed) as a second speed faster than the minimum speed.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, and the control speed is set to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operation speed. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated based on the minimum control speed, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated based on the maximum control speed, the maximum speed is achieved. Will be described as operating.

  Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R during acceleration and deceleration is the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. Further, when returning to the origin position after moving to the coalescence position, the movable body 177SG302L, The detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 after the 177SG302R is decelerated reliably.

  As shown in FIG. 10-23 (B), when performing the operation control at the time of detection, the CPU 120 for effect control will be described later in a period for moving from the origin position to the merged position and a period for moving from the merged position to the origin position. As a torque priority mode (a mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved at a low speed (minimum speed) instead of a large torque of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R, see FIG. 10-27), the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation is always performed. Control is performed so that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate at (first speed). That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed in the detection-time operation control as the first operation control that is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment). Then, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are always set based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation check operation control so that the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control is obtained. Control to operate.

  In the case of detection operation control, since the operation distance of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is shorter than that of the actual operation confirmation operation control, if the operation speed is accelerated in the actual operation confirmation operation control, that is, the operation is performed at a high speed. The detected part cannot be reliably detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, or the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R and the like are damaged by an impact when the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R return to the origin position from a short distance and are restricted from moving. Therefore, control is performed so as to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (C), when performing the non-detection operation control, the effect control CPU 120 moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the combined position to the origin position. As a torque priority mode (see FIG. 10-27), which will be described later, control is performed so as to always operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 120 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control that is equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (this implementation). In the characteristic part 177SG of the embodiment, based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds that are always set in the actual operation check operation control so that the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control is obtained. Control for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is performed.

  In this case, since it is unknown how far the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are from the origin position, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located in the vicinity of the origin position, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation When operated at a high control speed, that is, at a high speed, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R return to the origin position, the origin detection sensor 177SG401 cannot reliably detect the detected part or the movable body 177SG302L from a short distance. , 177SG302R is returned to the origin position, and the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R, etc. may be damaged due to an impact when the movement is restricted, so control is performed so as to operate at the minimum speed in the actual operation check operation control. .

  As described above, in the feature part 117SG of the present embodiment, in the second initialization process, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved at a high speed (maximum speed) instead of the torque of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R being small. By executing the actual operation check operation control in the speed priority mode capable of performing the actual operation check operation control, the actual operation check operation control can be quickly completed.

  On the other hand, in the second initialization process, in the torque priority mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved at a low speed (minimum speed) instead of the torque of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R being large, operation confirmation operation control during detection or non-detection By executing the hourly operation control, it is possible to obtain a torque larger than the torque required for rotation when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move toward the origin position, and therefore the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move to the origin position. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be reliably moved to the origin position while preventing the motor from stopping without rotating in the middle.

  10-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display effect process in FIG. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the respective values of the process timer, the change time timer, and the change control timer (177SGS301, 177SGS302, 177SGS303). The process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer are values set in the variable display start setting process in FIG. 7 in order to execute an effect during the variation display.

  In 177SG304, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has expired, the process data is switched (177SGS305). That is, in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 7, the process timer is set by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table set according to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display to be executed. Start again (177SGS306). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect parts) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, and the like set next (177SGS307). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the rendering device (for rendering) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) The control of the component is executed (177SGS308).

  After the execution of 177SGS307 or 177SGS308, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process data being executed is the process data of the super reach C, that is, whether or not the change display is being executed with the change pattern of the super reach C. Is determined (177SGS310). When the process data being executed is not the process data of the super reach C (177SGS310; N), the process proceeds to 177SGS321, and when the process data being executed is the process data of the super reach C (177SGS310; Y), the movable body 177SG302L , 177SG302R is determined whether it is the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B for moving from the origin position toward the combined position (177SGS311).

  When it is the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (177SGS311; Y), in the image display device 5, the push button operation promotion image 177SGZ1 for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (FIG. 10-30 (A)). (See 177SGS312) and proceed to 177SGS313. If it is not the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (177SGS311; N), the process proceeds to 177SGS313 without executing the process of 177SGS312.

  In 177SGS313, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the push button 31B is in the operation acceptance period (177SGS313). When the operation reception period of the push button 31B is in progress (177SGS313; Y), a director effect operation process for operating the accessory (movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R) based on the operation of the push button 31B is executed (177SGS314). ) Proceed to 177SGS320.

  If it is not during the operation reception period of the push button 31B (177SGS313; N), it is determined whether it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (177SGS315). When it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (177SGS315; Y), the display of the push button operation promotion image 177SGZ1 on the image display device 5 is ended (177SGS316), and a later-described accessory operation start flag is set. If it has, the accessory operation started flag is cleared (177SGS317), and the process proceeds to 177SGS318.

  If it is not the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B in 177SGS315 (177SGS315; N), the process proceeds to 177SGS318 without executing the processes of 177SGS316 and 177SGS317.

  Then, in 177SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B has already elapsed (177SGS318). When the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B has not elapsed (177SGS318; N), the process proceeds to 177SGS321, and when the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B has elapsed (177SGS318; Y), the origin detection sensor 177SG401 further. Is ON, that is, whether the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302 are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 (177SGS319).

  When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON (177SGS319; Y), the process proceeds to 177SGS321, and when the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is OFF (177SGS319; N), the accessory (movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R) is moved from the combined position to the origin position. The effect actor storing process for moving and storing it toward is executed (177SGS320), and the process proceeds to 177SGS321.

  In 177SGS321, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation control timer has timed out (177SGS321). When the variation control timer has timed out (177SGS321; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left, middle and right decorative symbols (displayed 30 ms after the previous decorative symbol display switching time). Image data of the power screen) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (177SGS322). In this way, decorative pattern variation control is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. As such, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variation of the decorative design. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the variation control timer (177SGS323).

  When the variation control timer has not timed out (177SGS321; N), after execution of 177SGS323, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation time timer has timed out (177SGS324). If the variable time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (S173) (177SGS326). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (177SGS325; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the waiting process per special figure ( The value is updated according to S173) (177SGS326). Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the control shifts to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern designation command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates or the like is issued. Even in the case of reception, the variation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol is finished).

  In the process table used for decoration pattern variation control, process data during decoration pattern variation display is set. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the decorative symbol variation time. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n is timed out in the process of 177SGS304, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the decorative design effect control based on the process table ends. To do.

  10-25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect actor operation process in the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10-24. In the effect actor operation process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is an operation of the push button 31B (177SGS331). When there is an operation of the push button 31B (177SGS331; Y), it is further determined whether or not the accessory operating flag indicating that the accessory (movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R) is operating is set (177SGS332). ). When the accessory operating flag is not set (177SGS332; N), it is determined whether or not the merge detection sensor 177SG402 is ON, that is, whether or not the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the merged position is completed. Determine (177SGS333).

  When the uniting detection sensor 177SG402 is ON (177SGS333; Y), the stage actor operation process is terminated, and when the uniting detection sensor 177SG402 is OFF (177SGS333; N), that is, to the united position of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. If the movement of the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R has been started based on the operation of the push button 31B even once during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, Is determined (177SGS334).

  When the combination operation start flag has not been set (177SGS334; N), output of an operation instruction in the speed priority mode is started for the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS335). In addition, the actor action started flag and the actor operating flag indicating that the accessory (movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R) is in operation are set, and the effect actor action processing is ended (177SGS336, 177SG337).

  As shown in FIG. 10-27, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment reduce the torque and move the movable body 177SG302L, in response to an operation instruction from the effect control CPU 120. Speed priority mode that can move 177SG302R at high speed and low biasing force, and torque priority that can move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at low speed and high biasing force compared to speed priority mode while increasing torque compared to speed priority mode It is possible to drive in mode.

  Returning to FIG. 10-25, in the case where the accessory operation started flag is set in 177SGS334 (177SGS334; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, at least once. Although the operations of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are started based on the operation of the push button 31B, the operations of the push button 31B are not continuously executed. It is determined whether or not there is almost no movement (177SGS338).

  When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON (177SGS338; Y), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are positioned in the vicinity of the origin position, that is, rotate while moving from the origin position toward the combined position (see FIG. 10-12 to FIG. 10-13), based on the fact that sufficient acceleration can be obtained, operation command output in the speed priority mode is started for the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS335). Then, the accessory operation start completed flag is set, and the process proceeds to 177SGS337 (177SGS336). On the other hand, when the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is OFF (177SG338; N), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate away from the origin position, that is, in the middle of moving from the origin position toward the combined position ( (See FIGS. 10-12 to 10-13), it may not be possible to obtain sufficient acceleration for the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R to output an operation instruction in the torque priority mode. It starts (177SGS339), sets the acting in-progress flag, and finishes the stage effect operating process (177SGS337).

  In addition, when the accessory operating flag is set in 177SGS332 (177SGS332; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the merge detection sensor 177SG402 is ON, that is, the merged positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. It is determined whether or not the movement to is completed (177SGS340). When the uniting detection sensor 177SG402 is OFF (177SGS340; N), the output of the operation instruction in the speed priority mode or the operation instruction in the torque priority mode is continued for the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R by ending the effect actor operation process. Subsequently, the operations of the movable bodies 177SGS302L and 177SGS302R are executed. When the uniting detection sensor 177SG402 is ON (177SGS340; Y), the driving of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is stopped by outputting a stop instruction to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS342). The combination-in-progress flag is cleared (177SGS343), and the effect combination operation process is terminated.

  In the case where there is no operation of the push button 31B in 177SGS331 (177SGS331; N), it is determined whether an accessory operating flag is set (177SGS341). When the accessory operating flag is set (177SGS341; Y), that is, when the operation of the push button 31B is completed while the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operating, the stop instruction is given to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R. Is output to stop the driving of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS342), clear the actor operating flag (177SGS343), and end the effect actor operating process.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, whether or not the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the combined position in the director action operation process, that is, is movable. Although the drive mode for driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is illustrated based on the positions where the bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production actor operation In the processing, the drive mode for driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is changed based on the number of times the push button 31B is operated during the operation reception period of the push button 31B (for example, the operation of the push button 31B is the first operation). In this case, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode, and when the push button 31B is operated for the second time or later, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode. Good.

  FIG. 10-26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect actor storage process in the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10-24. In the effect accessory storing process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the accessory operating flag is set (177SGS351). When the accessory operating flag is set (177SGS351; Y), the driving of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is stopped by outputting a stop instruction to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS370). The combination act in progress flag is cleared (177SGS371), and the effect combination storing process is terminated.

  Further, when the accessory operating flag is not set (177SGS351; N), whether or not the accessory storing flag indicating that the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operating toward the origin position is set. Is determined (177SGS352). When the stored accessory flag is not set (177SGS352; N), that is, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not yet operating toward the origin position, the storage (origin body 177SG302L and 177SG302R) is stored (origin). It is determined whether or not it is during a period of starting (movement toward the position) (177SGS353).

  When it is out of the period for starting the storing of the accessory (177SGS353; N), the effect storing process is ended, and when the storing of the accessory is in the period of starting (177SGS353; Y), the uniting detection sensor 177SG402 It is determined whether or not it is ON, that is, whether or not the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the combined position (177SGS354). When the union detection sensor 177SG402 is ON, sufficient acceleration can be obtained for rotation (see FIGS. 10-12 to 10-13) when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the union position to the origin position. Based on what can be done, an operation instruction in the speed priority mode is output to the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R (177SGS355), and the accessory storing flag is set and the effect accessory storing process is ended (177SGS357).

  In addition, when the coalescence detection sensor 177SG402 is OFF in 177SGS354 (177SGS354; N), since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not arranged at the coalescence position, the rotation is performed when moving to the origin position (FIGS. 10-12). Based on the fact that sufficient acceleration cannot be obtained (see FIG. 10-13), an operation instruction in the torque priority mode is output to the motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R for movement (177SGS356) and the accessory is being stored. The flag is set and the effect accessory storing process is ended (177SGS357).

  Further, when the accessory storing flag is set in 177SGS352 (177SGS352; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, to the origin positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. It is determined whether or not the movement has been completed (177SGS360). When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is ON, that is, when the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position is completed (177SGS360; Y), a stop instruction is output to the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R. The driving of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R is stopped (177SGS361), and the accessory storing flag is cleared (177SGS362), and the effect accessory storing process is ended.

  When the origin detection sensor 177SG401 is OFF, that is, when the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position has not been completed (177SGS360; N), the 177SGS361 and 177SGS362 are not performed and the rendering role is performed. The object storage process is terminated.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. When the player continuously operates the push button 31B (for example, long press), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate (move) from the origin position toward the combined position.

  When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move toward the combined position during the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach C, the operations of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are the initial operations (the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are at the origin position). If the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is a re-operation when the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are located at the origin position or the origin position, the movement motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. If the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are reactivated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at different positions (non-origin positions), the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode. It has become the jar.

  That is, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move toward the combined position during the change display in the change pattern of the super reach C, the speed priority mode driving of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R based on the operation of the push button 31B is performed. When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move away from the origin position (when the detected part of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R moves outside the detection range of the origin detection sensor 177SG401), as shown in FIG. 10-29 (A). Since the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode based on the operation of the push button 31B again, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are aligned from the origin position. It said operating unable rotation in developing moving (see FIG 10-12～ diagram 10-13) is prevented from resulting in stop towards the position. Further, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R do not substantially move from the origin position due to the driving in the speed priority mode of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R based on the operation of the push button 31B (the detected part of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R detects the origin). When the sensor 177SG401 does not move out of the detection range), as shown in FIG. 10-29 (B), the movement motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R are again set in the speed priority mode based on the operation of the push button 31B. Therefore, sufficient acceleration for rotating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the origin position toward the combined position (see FIGS. 10-12 to 10-13) can be obtained. It has become.

  When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate toward the origin position during the variation display in the variation pattern of the super reach C, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the operation is related to the operation of the push button 31B. In other words, the control by the operation of the push button 31B is disabled. Further, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the combined position (second position) when starting the operation, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode and the operation is started. When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are disposed at a position (non-merged position) different from the combined position (second position), the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode.

  In the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the player or the like once operates the push button 31B during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, and then operates again to move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the combined position. Although the form of restarting is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a player or the like operates the push button 31B again during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, the push button is started from the timing. When the period until the end timing of the operation reception period of 31B is longer than the period until the operation of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is completed, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the combined position based on the operation of the push button 31B again. Do not work towards It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, when the push button 31B is operated again with the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R positioned at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are set to the speed priority mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the push button 31B is operated again, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are always moved regardless of the origin position. The 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in the torque priority mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load in the effect actor operation process of the effect control CPU 120 and to reduce the data capacity required for the effect agent operation process.

  On the other hand, in the variation display with the variation pattern of super reach D, the movement from the origin position to the merge position of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R and the change from the merge position to the origin position are the same as the variation display with the variation pattern of super reach C. The movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are speed-prioritized as shown in FIG. 10-28, both being performed regardless of the operation of the push button 31B. Driven in mode. In the feature 177SG of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D, the drive mode of the movement motors 177SG391L, 177SG391R is executed regardless of the operation of the push button 31B, that is, Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R do not stop during the operation, the single speed priority mode is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the origin position When moving from the coalesced position to the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the advancing speed priority mode. In the speed priority mode for evacuation where the moving speed is different (for example, the moving speed is fast) Rotating motor 177SG391L, it may be driven 177SG391R.

  Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated regardless of the operation of the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it perform only about the start of operation | movement of movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R according to operation of push button 31B.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 177SG of this embodiment, although the variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B is illustrated as an example, only the super reach D is illustrated. However, the variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B may be set to, for example, a normal reach variation pattern, or other than the super reach D. You may set as another super reach, for example, super reach E. As described above, when the fluctuation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B is also set as the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach having a lower expectation than the super reach D, the super pattern is set. The movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in a normal reach speed priority mode that is different from the speed priority mode of reach D (for example, the movement speed is slow). Further, the speed priority mode of the super reach D is set even when the super reach E having a lower hit expectation than the super reach D is set as a variation pattern for operating the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R regardless of the operation of the push button 31B. The movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be driven in the super reach E speed priority mode that is different from the movement speed (for example, the movement speed is slow). That is, as the speed priority mode, a plurality of speed priority modes having different moving speeds are also provided. You may make it use properly according to.

  In the effect actor storing process in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated toward the origin position, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. There is a case where it is driven in the torque priority mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. The movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may always be driven in the torque priority mode. In this way, for example, when a power interruption occurs while the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated toward the origin position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moving to the origin position after the power interruption is restored. Thus, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R can be reliably moved to the origin position while preventing the motor from stopping without rotating (see FIGS. 10-12 and 10-13).

  Next, an example of the movable body effect by the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R of the rendering device 300 will be described based on FIGS. 10-30 and 10-31.

  For example, at a predetermined timing after the display of decorative symbols based on the variation pattern of super reach C is started and the reach is established and developed into super reach, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 10-30 (A). As described above, the push button operation promotion image 177SGZ1 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the operation reception period of the push button 31B.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (B), the CPU 120 for effect control moves the moving body 177SG310 by the lifting motor 177SG305 based on the operation of the push button 31B within the operation reception period, thereby moving the left and right. The bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R simultaneously start moving from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position), and the rotating motor 177SG367 moves the rotating unit 177SG330B from the first protruding position to the storage position. The movable portion 177SG330 changes from the first state to the second state.

  As shown in FIG. 10-30 (C), in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach C, if the operation of the push button 31B is once released during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, it is movable. The movement of the bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the first position (origin position) to the second position (union position) is interrupted.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (D), when the push button 31B is continuously operated during the operation reception period of the push button 31B or when the operation of the push button 31B is resumed, D) and as shown in FIG. 10-30 (E), the peripheral walls 177SG322E and 177SG322F of the guided member 177SG320 abut against the abutting bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B, and the moving body 177SG310 moves while maintaining the corresponding state. Accordingly, the movable portion 177SG330 rotates about 180 degrees around the rotation shaft 177SG311 facing in the up-down direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (E), the left and right movable parts 177SG330 which are each inverted by about 180 degrees at the second position (merged position) are brought into contact with each other, and the rotating part 177SG330B is rotated. Stopped at the second protruding position. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (F), the effect control CPU 120 raises the movable rail 177SG351 by the lifting motor 177SG305, whereby the movable portion 177SG330 rises with respect to the base 177SG331, and the image display device 5 The effect image 177SGZ2 is displayed around the movable portion 177SG330 on the display screen. Thereafter, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are returned from the second position to the first position, and the image display device 5 derives and displays the decorative symbols in a combination of jackpots. If the variation display variation pattern is a super reach C loss variation pattern, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the first position immediately before the second position shown in FIG. 10-30 (E) and then returned to the first position. Then, the decorative pattern may be derived and displayed in the image display device 5 by a combination of loses.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (A), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are in the first positions (origin positions) separated from each other in the left and right directions, the front cover 177SG333 and the frame body cover 177SG370L of the left movable body 177SG302L. To form a first left rendering part imitating the right half of the airplane, and a first right imitating the left half of the airplane by the front cover 177SG333 and the frame cover 177SG370R of the right movable body 177SG302R. A production section is formed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (E) and 10-30 (F), when the second movable body 177SG302L on the left side and the right side cover 177SG334 are in the second position (combined position) in contact with or close to each other. The movable body 177SG302R and the rear cover 177SG334 of the movable body 177SG334 are arranged side by side in the left and right, thereby forming one second effect section that imitates the entire airplane.

  Thus, in the first position, the front surface of the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R and the frame cover 177SG370L, 177SG370R constitute the first left rendering section and the first right rendering section, and in the second position, the movable bodies 177SG302L, A second rendering unit different from the first rendering unit is configured by the back surface of 177SG302R. More specifically, the first left production unit and the first right production unit are production units that can specify about 2/3 of the aircraft body, while the second production unit is a production unit that can identify the entire aircraft body. is there.

  That is, since a part of the 1st left production part and the 1st right production part which were separately in the right-and-left position in the 1st position move and unite, one 2nd production part is constituted. Unexpectedness can be given. Moreover, since the size of the airplane which is the 2nd production | presentation part is larger than the magnitude | size of the airplane which is the 1st left production | presentation part and the 1st right production | presentation part, it can give a more surprising property.

  Further, for example, when the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 10-30 (A) is executed, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are turned on by turning on the movable LED 177SG338F and causing the translucent lens portions 177SG340F, 177SG371L, and 177SG371R to emit light. When the left and right movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are combined as shown in FIG. 10-30 (E), the movable LED 177SG338B is turned on and the light transmitting lens portion 177SG340B emits light. You may make it perform the definite effect which alert | reports a big hit by doing. Furthermore, for example, the left and right movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are used as a notice effect that suggests that there is a possibility that a super reach effect as shown in FIGS. A movable body effect such as reciprocal movement between the first position and the position before the third position may be executable.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (A), when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located at the first position, the movable LEDs 177SG338F are turned on to cause the light transmitting lens portions 177SG340F, 177SG371L, and 177SG371R to emit light. Thus, while the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R and the frame body cover 177SG370L, 177SG370R can be improved, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R moves from the first position toward the second position and the frame body cover 177SG370L. , 177SG370R and the movable body 177SG302L and 177SG302R and the frame cover 177SG370L, 177SG3 It can be and 0R is inconspicuous that they are separated.

  In addition, when the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is started and the reach is established, the reach effect of the super reach D is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 10-31 (A). The

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 (B) and 10-31 (C), the movable body 177SG310 is moved by the elevating motor 177SG305 based on the progress of the reach effect of the super reach D, thereby moving the left and right. The bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R simultaneously start moving from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position), and the rotating motor 177SG367 moves the rotating unit 177SG330B from the first protruding position to the storage position. The movable portion 177SG330 changes from the first state to the second state.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (D), the reach effect of super reach D is further executed, so that the peripheral walls 177SG322E and 177SG322F of the guided member 177SG320 come into contact with the contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B, and the corresponding contact is made. By moving the moving body 177SG310 while maintaining the above state, the movable portion 177SG330 rotates about 180 degrees around the rotation shaft 177SG311 facing in the vertical direction.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (E), the left and right movable parts 177SG330, which are each inverted by about 180 degrees at the second position (merged position), come into contact and merge, and the rotating part 177SG330B rotates. Stopped at the second protruding position. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (F), the effect control CPU 120 raises the movable rail 177SG351 by the elevating motor 177SG305, whereby the movable portion 177SG330 rises with respect to the base 177SG331, and the image display device 5 The effect image 177SGZ2 is displayed around the movable portion 177SG330 on the display screen. Thereafter, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are returned from the second position to the first position, and the image display device 5 derives and displays the decorative symbols in a combination of jackpots.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (first position) by operating the player's push button 31B during the reach production of Super Reach C. When the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are operated. When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated at a high speed and a low urging force by being driven in the speed priority mode, and the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not arranged at the origin position. , Move Motor 177SG391L, movable body 177SG302L by driving the 177SG391R by the torque priority mode, by operating the 177SG302R at low speed and Takazuke force, thereby improving the presentation effect of the movable body effect.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the movable body effect can be executed by operating the push button 31B of the player during the reach effect of Super Reach C is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited, and the movable body effect may be executable by operating the operation means (for example, the stick controller 31A) other than the push button 31B of the player during the reach effect of the super reach C.

  Further, as a movable body effect, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are directed to the combined position at a high speed and with a low biasing force. While the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not arranged at the origin position, that is, after the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R start moving toward the combined position, the operation of the push button 31B is released. When the push button 31B is operated again after the movement is stopped and the movement of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the combined position is resumed, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the combined position at a low speed and with a high biasing force. Since the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are first moved from the origin position toward the combined position, and when the operation toward the combined position of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is resumed, the movable body 177SG302L is moved. , 177SG302R are different from each other, so that the effect of producing the movable body can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (C) to 10-30 (D), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R rotate in the process of moving from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position). As a result, unexpectedness can be imparted to the movable body effect, so that it is possible to improve the entertainment of the movable body effect.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 177SG of the present embodiment, as a movable body effect, the movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R exemplifies a form that rotates in the process of moving from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R during the production of the movable body are deformed and light-emitting in the process of moving from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position). Further, it may be moved in a direction other than the combined position, or may be simply moved from the origin position to the combined position.

  In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, in the second initialization process (177SGS051), if the detected part of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is not detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401, it is not detected. After the hourly operation control is executed, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode to execute the actual operation confirmation operation, and the origin detection sensor 177SG401 detects the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. In this case, after the operation control at the time of detection is executed, the operation for confirming the actual operation is executed by driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. Regardless of whether or not the detected parts of 7SG302L and 177SG302R are detected, the actual operation confirmation operation is executed by driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the speed priority mode. Can be simplified.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the origin position (first position) during the reach performance of Super Reach C ( In the case of executing the retracting operation in the present invention, the driving modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are changed according to the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R when the retracting operation is started, that is, the retracting operation is started. Although the mode in which the operation modes of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are changed according to the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at the time of performing is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modification example 177SG-1 is a super Reach production of reach C When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the origin position (first position) (when the retracting operation in the present invention is performed), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (first position). The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are directed toward the origin position (first position) according to the drive mode of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R when moved toward the second position) (when the advance operation in the present invention is performed). The drive modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are changed (that is, according to the speeds of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the combined position, Body 177SG302L, movable body 177SG302L when moving toward the origin position from 該合 body position 177SG302R, may be a different order) as the speed of 177SG302R.

  Further, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the origin position (first position) during the reach production of Super Reach C (when the retracting operation in the present invention is executed), the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin position. Regardless of the drive mode of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R when moved from the (first position) toward the combined position (second position) (when the advance operation in the present invention is performed), the movement motor 177SG391L is always used. , 177SG391R is driven in the speed priority mode (that is, when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the origin position, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are always moved at a high speed and with a low urging force). There. By doing in this way, the process at the time of moving movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R toward an origin position (1st position) can be simplified.

  In addition to the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R, the rendering device 177SG300 in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment includes contact bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B. Contacted with the abutting bosses 177SG385A and 177SG385B at the third position on the way from the united position (second position) or the combined position (second position) to the origin position (first position). By moving the guided member 177SG320 about 180 degrees by moving to the right or left while maintaining the state, the direction (posture) is changed from the front (first posture) to the rear (second posture). That is, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move. Since the orientation is changed by reluctant rotated, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the movable body effect.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention can be changed or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. include.

  For example, in the characteristic part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the advantage (for example, jackpot probability) for the player is constant in the normal state, the short-time state, and the probability change state is illustrated. For example, as a modification 177SG-2, a setting unit capable of setting one set value from a plurality of set values is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is set by the set unit. Depending on the set value, the player's advantage (for example, jackpot probability) may be different. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process (see FIG. 5), the CPU 103 selects a display result determination table in which the range of the determination value (MR1) assigned to the jackpot according to the set value is set, What is necessary is just to determine whether a fluctuation display result is a big hit.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of setting the setting value in this way, the CPU 103 can change the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on condition that the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. What is necessary is just to be able to control to a state (change permission state).

  As described above, when the CPU 103 can control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the change-permitted state on condition that the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, as a modification 177SG-3, The non-detection operation control or the like may be executed by executing the second initialization process (FIGS. 10-21) in the change permission state. By doing so, since the non-detection operation control for returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position (first position) is executed in the change permission state, the setting value changing operation is hindered. It can be prevented from occurring.

  In addition, when the CPU 103 can control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the change-permitted state on the condition that the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 as described above, as a modification 177SG-4, the production control CPU 120 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and is not controlled by the CPU 103 in the change-permitted state, the second initialization process (FIG. 10-21) is executed to execute the non-detection operation control. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CPU 103 controls the change permission state, the second initialization process (FIG. 10-21) is not executed and the non-detection operation control is not executed. It may be. By doing so, the non-detection operation for returning the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to the origin position (first position) is not executed in the change permission state, which causes troubles in changing the set value. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the set value can be set in this way, as a modified example 177SG-3, when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 sets the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the set value. The effect control CPU 120 can execute non-detection automatic control, detection-time operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation by executing the second initialization process (see FIGS. 10-21). What is necessary is just to perform control.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach C, when the player operates the push button 31B again, the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R If the motor is not out of the detection range of the origin detection sensor 177SG401, the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach C When the player operates the push button 31B again when performing the movable body effect during the reach effect, whether or not the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are out of the detection range of the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Regardless of movement motor 177SG3 1L, may be allowed to drive at the always torque priority mode 177SG391R. In other words, in this case, the movable motors 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position) at a low speed and with a high biasing force by driving the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R in the torque priority mode. Therefore, the operation reception period of the push button 31B is set to be longer than the period during which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R move from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position) at a low speed and with a high biasing force. It is desirable to do.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach C, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin positions (first position) according to the operation of the push button 31B. To move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R according to whether or not the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when moving from the first position to the combined position (second position). The driving modes of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are illustrated as examples. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are located between the origin position and the combined position. Can detect the detected part When the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) toward the combined position (second position) in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B, the sensor moves the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R. The drive modes of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be varied depending on whether or not the detected portion is detected.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach C, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin positions (first position) according to the operation of the push button 31B. To move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R according to whether or not the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when moving from the first position to the combined position (second position). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are combined from the origin position (first position). In position (second position) If the push button 31B is operated during the operation reception period of the push button 31B and the push button 31B is operated again during the operation reception period of the push button 31B, the movement motor 177SG391L, The drive mode of 177SG391R may be varied.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach C, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin positions (in accordance with the long press operation of the push button 31B). The mode of moving from the first position to the combined position (second position) is illustrated, but when executing the movable body effect, the push button 31B is repeatedly hit and the stick controller 31A is moved in a plurality of directions. The movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R may be moved from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (second position) according to an operation (so-called revaccia) or the like. When executing the movable body effect in this way, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved from the origin position (first position) to the combined position (first position) according to the continuous hitting of the push button 31B or the operation of the stick controller 31A in a plurality of directions. When moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R from the origin position (first position) toward the combined position (second position), the number of operations of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A When the operation period or the like is measured and the push button 31B is operated again during the movable body effect period, the drive modes of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R may be varied according to the number of operations and the operation period. .

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach C, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin positions (first position) according to the operation of the push button 31B. To move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R according to whether or not the detected portions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when moving from the first position to the combined position (second position). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a sensor capable of detecting the rotation angle of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is provided. The sensor Movable body 177SG302L, movable body 177SG302L depending on whether or not the determination result is rotating in 177SG302R, moving motor 177SG391L for moving the 177SG302R, may be made different driving modes 177SG391R.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach C, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the origin positions (first position) according to the operation of the push button 31B. To move the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R according to whether or not the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when moving from the first position to the combined position (second position). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the proximity of the guided member 177SG320 to the contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B is illustrated. Can be detected A movable motor 177SG391L, 177SG391R for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R according to the determination result of whether or not the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302R are close to the contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B. Different drive modes may be used.

  That is, in the “first situation” and “second situation” in the present invention, the detected part of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R such as the characteristic part 177SG of the above-described embodiment is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401. Whether or not the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is operated, the operation period, the positions of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R between the origin position (first position) and the combined position (second position), the movable body 177SG302L. , 177SG302R is rotating, whether the guided member 177SG320 is close to the contact bosses 177SG385A, 177SG385B, and the like.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 177SG of the embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach C, when the operation of the push button 31B is received, the origin detection sensor 177SG401 causes the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to If the detected portion is not detected, the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved toward the combined position (second position) by driving the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R in the torque priority mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the torque priority mode for a predetermined period during the movable body effect. That is, after the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R have obtained a force to rotate reliably when moving toward the combined position (second position), the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. You may do it. By doing in this way, movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R can be moved to a combined position reliably and rapidly.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 177SG of the embodiment, when the movable body effect is executed during the reach effect of Super Reach C, when the operation of the push button 31B is received, the origin detection sensor 177SG401 causes the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R to Although it is determined whether or not the detected portion is detected and the drive modes of the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are illustrated according to the determination result, the present invention has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and when only one detected part of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the operation of the push button 31B is received, The other possible The moving motor corresponding to the body is driven in the torque priority mode to move the other movable body to the origin position, and then the two moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode to move the movable body 177SG302L. , 177SG302R may be moved from the origin position toward the combined position. Further, by driving the moving motor corresponding to the one movable body in the speed priority mode, the one movable body is moved from the origin position toward the combined position, and the moving motor corresponding to the other movable body is moved. The other movable body may be moved from the origin position toward the combined position by driving the motor in the torque priority mode.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, two movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are provided, and the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated in the movable body effect. However, the present invention is limited to this. There may be one or three or more movable bodies that operate in the movable body effect.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 177SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the movable body effect is executed during the variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body effect is You may perform as an effect which alert | reports that it is controlled to a probable change state after completion | finish of a big hit game, or an effect which alert | reports that this big hit game is a big hit game of 16 lands.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the present embodiment, the movable display 177SG302L and 177SG302R completes the movement from the first position (origin position) to the second position (combined position) during the variation display, so that the variation display result is a big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body effect is a chance-up effect during variable display, It may be executed as an effect other than the jackpot notification effect during the variable display, such as a development notification effect for notifying the development of a super reach reach effect.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, when the detected portion of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 as the moving body effect during the reach effect of Super Reach C, the push button Movement for moving the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R is determined based on the determination result by determining whether or not the detected parts of the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are detected by the origin detection sensor 177SG401 when the operation of 31B is received. The drive modes of the motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG39 are in accordance with the operation period of the push button 31B. Varying the R drive mode, i.e., the movable member 177SG302L in accordance with the operation period of the push button 31B, the moving velocity toward the united position of 177SG302R may be different.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above embodiment, the drive modes of the movement motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are exemplified as two drive modes of a speed priority mode and a torque priority mode. For example, the speed priority mode may be a plurality of high speed, medium speed, and low speed priority modes, or the torque priority mode may be a plurality of torque priority modes of high torque, medium torque, and low torque. The plurality of speed priority modes and the plurality of torque priority modes may be appropriately used depending on the situation. For example, when moving from the origin position based on the first operation of the push button 31B, the medium speed speed priority mode is set and the movement from the origin position is not the movement due to the first operation of the push button 31B. The low-speed speed priority mode may be used, and the high-speed speed priority mode may be used when moving from the combined position. The torque priority mode is also set to the high torque torque priority mode at the start of operation in the re-operation by re-operation of the push button 31B, and the medium torque torque priority mode from the time when the moving speed reaches the first speed after the operation starts In addition, from the point of time when the moving speed reaches the second speed, the torque priority mode of low torque may be set.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 177SG of the above-described embodiment, the first operation mode of the present invention is a mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated at high speed and low torque in the speed priority mode (high speed low torque operation mode). The second operation mode of the invention is exemplified as a mode in which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are operated at low speed and high torque in the torque priority mode (low speed high torque operation mode). Is not limited to the difference in speed and torque, the difference in the distance over which the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R operate, the difference in change rate and change position (change pattern) in the movement speed, The difference in the ratio of the distance between the fast part and the slow part, or the movable bodies 177SG302L, 177SG302 It may be a rotary or differences, etc. of the presence or absence of the extension of the rotation unit 177SG330B.

  That is, when the operating distance of the movable body differs depending on the effect, that is, when the first situation and the second situation are different in the effect and the operating distance of the movable object differs depending on the effect, the moving distance (effect ), The operation mode may be different. For example, when the movable body moves over a short distance, a low-speed drive mode is set so that the player can recognize the movement, and when the movable body moves over a long distance, the production is prevented from being delayed. The high speed drive mode is used to enhance the production effect, or conversely, the high speed mode is used when the movable body is repeatedly operated over a short distance and the movable body vibrates. In order to prevent the movable body from being damaged by inertial force, the low-speed mode should be used when the movable body is repeatedly operated at a distance longer than the repeated operation. Also good.

  Even when the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are moved to the combined position and stopped due to power interruption or error, the operation mode of the movable body after the stop is changed to the operation mode before the stop (for example, The operation mode (for example, torque priority mode) may be different from the speed priority mode.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 177SG of the embodiment, the movable body 177SG302L and 177SG302R, which are movable bodies of the present invention, are exemplified in the game board 2, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the movable body may be provided on the gaming machine frame 3 so that the player can touch it. In this case, contact between the movable body and the player is prevented. It is preferable from the viewpoint of player protection to provide a safety function to stop the operation of the movable body when contact is made between the movable body and the player by providing a sensor or the like to detect. As described above, when the movable body is stopped by the safety function, the operation mode of the movable body after the stop is different from the operation mode before the stop (for example, the high-speed mode) (for example, low mode). May be used as the mode).

  Further, as a movable body provided in the gaming machine frame 3, for example, in a movable body that protrudes upward or obliquely upward of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player's operation is interrupted during the protruding operation. Thus, even when the movable body stops, the operation mode of the movable body after stopping may be set to an operation mode different from the operation mode before stopping.

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 177SG of the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. For example, by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value, Can be started, and one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each of which can be identified, and the variable display result derived to the display device is displayed. Accordingly, the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a winning can be generated.

(Explanation regarding feature 042SG)
FIG. 11A is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area 042SG10 is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 042SG50 having a glass window 042SG50a so as to be rotatable about the left side, and the gaming area 042SG10 can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 042SG50. When the glass door frame 042SG50 is closed, the game area 042SG10 can be seen through the glass window 042SG50a.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the game board 2 is formed in a substantially square shape in front view with a synthetic resin material having translucency such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, etc. A nail (not shown), a guide rail 042SG2b, and the like are provided. The game board 2 is configured in a substantially square shape when viewed from the front by a non-translucent member such as a veneer board, and is provided on a board surface board in which obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 042SG2b and the like are provided on the front game board surface. It may be configured.

  In this feature part 042SG, the winning ball device 042SG6A, the variable winning ball device 042SG6B, the special variable winning ball device 042SG7, the passing gate 042SG41, the first special symbol display device 042SG4A, the second special symbol display device 042SG4B, and the normal symbol display device 042SG20. , First hold indicator 042SG25A, second hold indicator 042SG25B, universal hold indicator 042SG25C, center decorative frame 042SG51, image display device 5 (first hold storage display area 042SG5D, second hold storage display area 042SG5U, decorative design The display areas 042SG5L, 042SG5C, 042SG5R) include the winning ball device 177SG6A, the variable winning ball device 177SG6B, the special variable winning ball device 177SG7, and the passing gate 1 in the above-described characteristic portion 177SG. 7SG41, the first special symbol display device 177SG4A, the second special symbol display device 177SG4B, the normal symbol display device 177SG20, the first hold display device 177SG25A, the second hold display device 177SG25B, the universal figure hold display device 177SG25C, the center decoration frame 177SG51, The description of the same configuration as the image display device 5 (first reserved storage display area 177SG5D, second reserved storage display area 177SG5U, decorative symbol display areas 177SG5L, 177SG5C, 177SG5R) will be omitted.

  A first effect device 042SG300, a second effect device 042SG400, and a third effect device 042SG500 that operate according to effects are provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. The first effect device 042SG300 in the feature portion 042SG is an effect device having the same configuration as the effect body 177SG300 of the feature portion 177SG.

  The first effect device 042SG300 is provided with movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R, the second effect device 042SG400 is provided with movable bodies 042SG401, and the third effect device 042SG500 is provided with movable bodies 042SG511, 042SG521L, 042SG521, and these movable bodies 042SG302L, 042SG302R, 042SG401, 042SG511, 042SG521L, 042SG521R can move between each standby position and the effect position.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 (A) and 11-3 (B), the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R are arranged at the left and right side positions of the image display device 5 which is the standby position when not in operation. During operation, it slides from the standby position to the front position of the image display device 5 that is the effect position.

  Further, the movable body 042SG401 is disposed above the image display device 5 that is a standby position when not in operation, and the front position of the image display device 5 and the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R that are presentation positions from the standby position during operation. Move (drop) due to its own weight.

  The movable body 042SG511 is disposed at a position above the image display device 5 that is a standby position when not in operation (more precisely, a position between the image display device 5 and the non-operating movable body 042SG401 when viewed from the front). During operation, the robot moves (drops) from its standby position to the rear position of the image display device 5 that is the effect position by its own weight. That is, the movable body 042SG511 is blocked by the image display device 5 by moving from the standby position to the effect position, and changes from a state visible to the player to an invisible state. Further, as shown in FIG. 11C, an image of a specific character is printed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG511 in the feature portion 042SG. The movable body 042SG511 is provided so as to be movable only in the vertical direction (vertical direction) between the standby position and the effect position described above, and cannot be moved in other directions (for example, the left-right direction and the front-back direction). It has become.

  The movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are arranged at the left and right end positions on the back side of the image display device 5 that is a standby position when not in operation, and the left and right outer positions of the image display device 5 that is the effect position from the standby position when operating. Move to slide. That is, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are invisible to the player because they are blocked by the image display device 5 when not in operation, and change to a state that is visible to the player by moving to the effect position. To do.

  Here, the second effect device 042SG400 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the second effect device 042SG400 is an effect device arranged in front of the first effect device 042SG300. As shown in FIG. 11-6, the second effect device 042SG400 is a movable U-shaped substrate 042SG402 that can be dropped by its own weight from the standby position toward the effect position on the front side of the substrate 042SG402 as described above. A body 042SG401 and moving means 042SG403L, 042SG403R for moving (raising) the movable body 042SG401 from the effect position toward the standby position.

  The moving means 042SG403L, 042SG403R are lifted to rotate the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R and the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R that are extended in the vertical direction and whose upper and lower ends are rotatably supported with respect to the substrate 042SG402 and the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R. Motors 042SG408L and 042SG408R. The ascending motors 042SG408L, 042SG408R and the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R are connected via a gear member (not shown), and the ascending motors 042SG408L, 042SG408R are driven so that the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R rotate about the axis. It has become. A concave groove is formed in a spiral shape on the peripheral surfaces of the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R.

  The guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R include an arm 042SG409L and 042SG409R positioned at the left and right ends of the movable body 042SG401, and a drive body 042SG410L arranged below the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R to move the movable body 042SG401 from the effect position to the standby position. , 042SG410R are attached to be movable up and down.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the arms 042SG409L, 042SG409R are formed with through holes that are larger in diameter than the diameters of the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R in the vertical direction, and the guide shafts 042SG406L, 042SG406R are formed in these through holes. It is inserted. Therefore, the movable body 042SG401 can be smoothly dropped along the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R from the standby position toward the effect position without being hindered by frictional force or the like.

  The driving bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R are members for supporting the arms 042SG409L and 042SG409R of the movable body 042SG401 that has dropped to the effect position from below. Through holes that are slightly larger in diameter than the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R are formed in the drive bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R so as to face in the vertical direction, and the inner walls of these through holes are arranged around the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R. An engaging portion that engages with a concave groove formed on the surface is formed. Furthermore, the back surfaces of the driving bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R are in contact with the front surface of the substrate 042SG402. Therefore, when the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R are rotated by driving the ascending motors 042SG408L and 042SG408R, the engaging portions formed on the drive bodies 042SG410L and 042SG410R are the circumferential surfaces of the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R. Are moved in the vertical direction along the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R in a state where the rotation about the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R is regulated by the substrate 042SG402. Yes.

  By configuring the moving means 042SG403L and 042SG403R as described above, the movable body 042SG401 after dropping to the effect position moves along the guide shafts 042SG406L and 042SG406R by driving the lifting motors 042SG408L and 042SG408R. 042SG410L and 042SG410R are transported from the effect position to the standby position.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), solenoids for supporting the movable body 042SG401 from below the arms 042SG409L, 042SG409R to the standby position at the upper left and right ends of the substrate 042SG402. 042SG407L and 042SG407R are provided. The solenoids 042SG407L and 042SG407R are configured to release the holding of the movable body 042SG401 when excited. That is, the movable body 042SG401 is held by the solenoids 042SG407L and 042SG407R in the standby position when not in operation, and drops from the standby position toward the effect position by releasing the holding by the solenoids 042SG407L and 042SG407R during operation. It is like that.

  The falling movable body 042SG401 stops when the arms 042SG409L, 042SG409R finally come into contact with the driving bodies 042SG410L, 042SG410R at the production position, but the upper surface of the driving bodies 042SG410L, 042SG410R in the feature section 042SG Buffer portions 042SG411L and 042SG411R made of an elastic body such as a material are provided. Therefore, the movable body 042SG401 that is dropped is generated between the arm 042SG409L, 042SG409R and the drive body 042SG410L, 042SG410R due to the impact of the fall because the arm 042SG409L, 042SG409R comes into contact with the buffer portion 042SG411L, 042SG411R and stops. Next, the third effect device 042SG500 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-5, the third effect device 042SG500 is an effect device arranged behind the first effect device 042SG300. Further, the second effect device 042SG400 includes a flat substrate 042SG501, a movable body 042SG511 that can be dropped by its own weight from the standby position toward the effect position on the front side of the substrate 042SG501, and the front surface of the substrate 042SG501. On the side, movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R that are slidable between a standby position and an effect position are provided. In addition, the third effect device 042SG500 includes an elevating motor 042SG512 for moving (moving up and down) the movable body 042SG511 between the standby position and the effect position, and the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R between the standby position and the effect position. Slide motors 042SG522L and 042SG522R for sliding movement are also provided.

  As shown in FIG. 11-5, the image display device 5 is disposed on the front side of the substrate 042SG501. The image display device 5 is attached to the substrate 042SG501 via a spacer 042SG531. Therefore, a gap having a width L1 that is longer in the front-rear direction than the width (thickness) L2 in the front-rear direction of the movable body 042SG511 is formed between the image display device 5 and the front surface of the substrate 042SG501. The movable body 042SG511 can be dropped into the gap (movable to the effect position). Furthermore, since the gap is formed between the image display device 5 and the front surface of the substrate 042SG501, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are arranged on the back surface side of the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B), the rear surface of the movable body 042SG511 has a protruding portion 042SG511a protruding rearward. In addition, a long hole 042SG501a that is long in the vertical direction is formed in the substrate 042SG501. The long hole 042SG501a is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction, and the above-described protrusion 042SG511a is inserted from the front side. Therefore, the movable body 042SG511 can move between the standby position and the effect position in the vertical direction along the long hole 042SG511a.

  Further, on the right side of the long hole 042SG511a in the substrate 042SG501, a pivot 042SG501b is formed to protrude rearward. Further, an arm 042SG514 formed in a substantially bow shape is disposed on the back side of the substrate 042SG501. A bearing hole 042SG501b is formed at one end of the arm 042SG514, and the pivot 042SG501b is inserted into the bearing hole 042SG501b.

  Further, a through hole 042SG514d extending in a predetermined direction is formed at the other end portion of the arm 042SG514, and the rear end portion of the protruding portion 042SG511a is inserted into the through hole 042SG514d.

  Further, the arm 042SG514 is formed with an engaging portion 274B protruding rearward. Further, on the right side of the engagement portion 042SG514b at the rear of the substrate 042SG501, a disk body 042SG513 pivotally supported by a rotating shaft facing the front-rear direction of the lifting / lowering motor 042SG512 is disposed, and the disk body 042SG513 has a rear side. The protrusion part 042SG513c which faces is formed. When the movable body 042SG511 is disposed at the standby position, the protrusion 042SG513c abuts the engagement portion 042SG514b from the right side as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), as viewed from the front. By preventing rotation in the clockwise direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 11-7 (A)), movement (falling) toward the effect position of the movable body 042SG511 is restricted (movable body 042SG511 is controlled). Maintained in the standby position).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the disc body 042SG513 is rotated by driving the lifting / lowering motor 042SG512, the contact of the protrusion 042SG513c with the engaging portion 042SG514b is released. 042SG511 falls from the standby position toward the effect position, and the arm 042SG514 rotates clockwise in front view according to the fall of the movable body 042SG511.

  Then, after the movable body 042SG511 is moved (dropped) to the effect position, the disk body 042SG513 is rotated by the drive of the elevating motor 042SG512, so that the protruding portion 042SG513c comes into contact with the engaging portion 042SG514b from below. Then, when the disk body 042SG513 is continuously driven by the drive of the lifting motor 042SG512, the protruding portion 042SG513c pushes up the arm 042SG514 via the engaging portion 042SG514b, so that the movable body 042SG511 moves from the effect position to the standby position. Be raised.

  After the movable body 042SG511 is lifted from the effect position to the standby position, the engaging portion 042SG514b comes into contact with the protruding portion 042SG513 from the right side as shown in FIG. The body 042SG511 is maintained at the standby position.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (A) and 11-8 (B), the movable bodies 042SG521L, 042SG521R have a plurality of projecting portions 042SG521aL, 042SG521aR projecting rearward and numerous gear teeth. And rack portions 042SG501dL and 042SG501dR extending in the lateral direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8B, a plurality of long holes 042SG531L, 042SG531R facing in the left-right direction are formed below the long holes 042SG501a in the substrate 042SG501. The protrusions 042SG521aL and 042SG521aR described above are inserted into the holes 042SG531L and 042SG531R. Therefore, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R can move in the left-right direction between the standby position and the effect position along the long holes 042SG531L and 042SG531R.

  Further, slide motors 042SG522L and 042SG522R are arranged between the image display device 5 and the substrate 042SG501. Between the slide motors 042SG522L, 042SG522R and the rack part 042SG501dL, 042SG501dR, a first gear pivotally supported by the rotating shaft of the slide motors 042SG522L, 042SG522R and a second gear meshing with the rack parts 042SG501dL, 042SG501dR. When the first gear and the second gear are further meshed, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R can be slid between the standby position and the effect position by driving the slide motors 042SG522L and 042SG522R. ing.

  FIG. 11-9 (A) shows a variation pattern in the feature part 042SG. In this feature part 042SG, among the cases where the variable display result is “out of”, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. Corresponding to the case where the display result is “big hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach out-of-range variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach off variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the deviation fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The big hit fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a reach of normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a reach of super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ is executed. is there. In this feature 042SG, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, four or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach {circle around (2)} may be provided in addition to super reach α and super reach β.

  As shown in FIG. 11-9 (A), the special reach variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is performed in the feature unit 042SG is superreach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, It is set shorter than the super reach γ. In addition, the super reach production of the super reach β is executed for the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach reach production such as the super reach α, the super reach β, and the super reach γ in the feature unit 042SG is executed. The special pattern fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of the super reach α is executed, and the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach production of the super reach γ is executed. The special figure variation time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed.

  In this feature part 042SG, the big hit expectation is set such that the variable display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach γ, super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In other words, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpot.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 (B) and 11-9 (C), in the reach production of the super reach in the feature unit 042SG, the operations of the movable bodies 042SG511, 042SG521L, 042SG521R of the third presentation device 042SG500 An interlocking effect in which images displayed on the image display device 5 are interlocked with each other, and the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R of the first effect body 042SG300 operate (both movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R are combined at the effect position) and the second effect body 042SG400. At least one of the combined effects in which the movable body 042SG401 falls is executed.

  The interlocking effect will be described more specifically. For example, an airplane image 042SG5a is displayed in the image display device 5 during variable display as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B). Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (B) and 11-10 (C), the aircraft image 042SG5a is enlarged and displayed close to the player as the variable display progresses. The movable body 042SG511 is dropped from the standby position to the effect position (the back position of the image display device 5) at a specific timing. At this time, in conjunction with the fall of the movable body 042SG511, the image display device 5 starts displaying the image 042SG5b of the same character as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511, and the character appears as if the movable body 042SG511 is on standby. It moves from the position into the display screen of the image display device 5 and displays it as if it was transferred to an airplane.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (D), the character image 042SG5b and the airplane image 042SG5a are continuously enlarged and displayed so as to be close to the player on the image display device 5. At the same time, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are slid from the standby position (the back position of the image display device 5) to the effect position, so that the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R have both wings of the airplane displayed on the image display device 5. Produce a composition. That is, in the interlocking effect, the movable body 042SG511 itself can move only in the vertical direction, while the image 042SG5b of the same character as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 is brought closer to the player. The operation that the movable body 042SG511 cannot take is realized. By doing in this way, it is possible to give the player an impression that a part of the airplane image 042SG5a displayed on the image display device 5 approaches the display area of the image display device 5, and the game You can improve your interest.

  In addition, as the interlocking effect of the feature unit 042SG, the movable body 042SG511 is dropped from the standby position to the effect position (the back position of the image display device 5), and the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 in the image display device 5 The display of the image 042SG5b of the same character is started, that is, only the image corresponding to a part of the movable body 042SG511 is displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, in the linked performance, the movable body 042SG511 may be dropped from the standby position to the performance position, and the image display device 5 may start displaying an image corresponding to the entire movable body 042SG511.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) and 11-11 (B), the coalescing effect is a variable effect display as shown in the reach reach of the super reach D in the feature portion 117SG (see FIG. 10-31). The movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R move from the standby position toward the effect position while rotating, and form an integrated airplane at the effect position. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 (B) and 11-11 (C), the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R are raised at the effect position, and the movable body 042SG is dropped.

  For example, an airplane image 042SG5a is displayed in the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (B) and 11-10 (C), the plane image 042SG5a is directed to the player (toward the front side of the gaming machine) as the variable display progresses. The images are displayed so as to approach each other, and the specific timing movable body 042SG511 is dropped from the standby position to the effect position (the back position of the image display device 5). At this time, in conjunction with the fall of the movable body 042SG511, the image display device 5 starts displaying the image 042SG5b of the same character as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511, and the character appears as if the movable body 042SG511 is on standby. It moves from the position into the display screen of the image display device 5 and displays it as if it was transferred to an airplane.

  As shown in FIG. 11-9 (B), only the combined effect is executed in the reach effect of Super Reach α, and only the combined effect is performed in the reach effect of Super Reach β. In the reach production of super reach γ, both the interlocking production and the combined production are executed.

  As described above, in this feature unit 042SG, with regard to the super reach variation pattern, the big hit expectation degree that the variable display result becomes “big hit” in the order of super reach γ, super reach β, and super reach α is increased. Therefore, regarding the presence / absence of execution of the continuous production and the combined production, the expectation of the big hit is the highest when both the continuous production and the combined production are executed, and the case where only the linked production is executed is the biggest hit Expectation level is low (a big hit expectation level regarding the presence or absence of execution of the continuous effect and the combined effect; execute the continuous effect and the combined effect> execute only the combined effect> execute only the linked effect).

  In addition, in the feature part 042SG of the present embodiment, the combined effect for operating the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R is executed during variable display, and the form that suggests the jackpot expectation is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. The combined effect for operating the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R may be executed as a notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit during variable display.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (A) and 11-12 (B), after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit during the variable display, the image display device 5 stops. The highlighted display of the displayed big hit symbol is displayed a plurality of times, and the character image 042SG5x displayed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG302L is displayed. At this time, the movable body 042SG302L is slightly moved from the standby position toward the effect position, and is temporarily stopped at the moved position (prepared position of the movable body 042SG302L).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-12 (C), in the image display device 5, the highlighted display of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped is displayed over a plurality of times and the character displayed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG302R. The image 042SG5y is displayed. At this time, the movable body 042SG302R is slightly moved from the standby position toward the effect position, and is temporarily stopped at the moved position (preparation position of the movable body 042SG302R).

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 (D) and 11-12 (E), the image 042SG5x of the character displayed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG302L and the front surface of the movable body 042SG302R in the image display device 5 are displayed. It is only necessary to display both the image 042SG5y of the character being moved and move the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R from the respective preparation positions toward the effect position, and then drop the movable body 042SG401.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-10, the position of the image display device 5 as the effect position from the upper position of the image display device 5 as the standby position. When the movable body 042SG511 is made invisible by the player by moving (falling) to the back side, and the movable body 042SG511 falls, it is the same as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 in the image display device 5. Is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 so that the character is transferred to the airplane or as if it is approaching the player. That is, in the feature unit 042SG, in conjunction with the fall of the movable body 042SG511, the image display device 5 can perform a display that the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 cannot obtain on the movable body 042SG511. Therefore, the production effect can be enhanced.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-10, the feature unit 042SG has a mode in which the visibility of the movable body 042SG511 can be suitably reduced by dropping the movable body 042SG511 to the back side of the image display device 5. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a mode for reducing the visibility of the movable body 042SG511, for example, a movable body 042SG511 itself or its surroundings is provided with light emitting means such as an LED, The visibility of the movable body 042SG511 may be lowered by turning off the light emitting means. Alternatively, the movable body 042SG511 may be provided so as to be movable in the front-rear direction, and the movable body 042SG511 may be moved backward to reduce the visibility of the movable body 042SG511.

  Furthermore, in this feature part 042SG, the form which reduces the visibility of this movable body 042SG511 by operating movable body 042SG511 is illustrated, However, This invention is not limited to this, Visual recognition of movable body 042SG511 The movable body that operates to reduce the performance may include other movable bodies provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 other than the movable body 042SG511. That is, the movable body 042SG511 may be provided as an inoperable decorative body, and the visibility of the decorative body may be reduced by the operation of another movable body, or the movable body may be operated by the operations of both the movable body 042SG511 and the other movable body. The visibility of 042SG511 may be reduced.

  Moreover, in this feature part 042SG, as shown to FIGS. 11-5, although the stand-by position of the movable body 042SG511 and the production | presentation position both set the back of the image display apparatus 5 as an example, this invention is limited to this. However, if the visibility of the movable body 042SG511 can be lowered by moving the movable body 042SG511 to an effect position behind the image display device 5, the standby position of the movable body 042SG511 is an image. It may be in front of the display device 5.

  Further, in this feature unit 042SG, the movable body 042SG511 is completely hidden by the image display device 5 by moving the movable body 042SG511 from the standby position to the effect position (not visible to the player). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect position of the movable body 042SG511 does not have to be a position at which the player cannot completely see. In other words, in the present invention, “change to the second specific mode that is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the first specific mode” means that the movable body 042SG511 is completely visible from the player by moving from the standby position to the effect position. Both the form which becomes impossible and the form which only a part of movable body 042SG511 becomes invisible to a player are included.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-10, in conjunction with the movement (drop) of the movable body 042SG511 from the standby position to the effect position, the same character as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 in the image display device 5 is displayed. By displaying the image 042SG5b, it is possible to enhance the effect of moving the movable body 042SG511 from the standby position to the effect position.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-10, in the interlocking effect, when the movable body 042SG511 is located at the standby position of the movable body 042SG511, that is, the character displayed on the movable body 042SG511 in the image display device 5. When the image 042SG5b is not displayed, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are maintained at the rear position of the image display device 5 which is the standby position of the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R, and the image display device 5 displays the image 042SG5b of the character. In this case, the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are moved to the left and right side positions of the image display device 5 which are the production positions of the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R, thereby moving these movable bodies 042SG52. L, it is possible to enhance the effect of the linking representations by displaying 042SG521R image 042SG5b.

  In this feature part 042SG, the movable bodies 042SG521L, 042SG521R are illustrated as moving from the standby positions of the movable bodies 042SG521L, 042SG521R to the effect positions in the linked performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. There is no interlocking effect, and the movable body 042SG521L, 042SG521R is easier to see from the player than the second specified state from the second specified state, which is difficult to see from the player according to the display of the image 042SG5b on the image display device 5. If it is the production | presentation which changes to a specific state, the production | presentation aspect does not ask | require. For example, light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R, and the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R are difficult to see from the player by turning on the light emitting means according to the display of the image 042SG5b on the image display device 5. The second specific state may be changed to the first specific state that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the second specific state.

  Further, the image display device 5 is movably provided, and at least one of the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R and the image display device 5 is moved in accordance with the display of the image 042SG5b on the image display device 5, thereby moving the movable bodies 042SG521L and 042SG521R. The second specific state, which is difficult for the player to visually recognize, may be changed to the first specific state, which is easier for the player to visually recognize than the second specific state.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-12, in the feature unit 042SG, when the movable body 042SG302L is operated as a notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit during variable display, the image display device 5, the character image 042SG5x displayed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG302L is displayed. When the movable body 042SG302R is operated, the image display device 5 displays the character image displayed on the front surface of the movable body 042SG302R. The image 042SG5y is displayed. Furthermore, when both the movable body 042SG302L and the movable body 042SG302R are operated, the display effect of the notification effect can be enhanced by displaying both the image 042SG5x and the image 042SG5y described above on the image display device 5. .

  In addition, as a notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit during variable display, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the emphasis display of the decorative pattern is performed on the image display device 5 a plurality of times. Since different images (either image 042SG5x or image 042SG5y) are displayed when only the movable body 042SG302L is operated and when only the movable body 042SG302R is operated, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state. The production effect can be enhanced.

  In this feature 042SG, as a notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit during variable display, there is a difference between when only the movable body 042SG302L is operated and when only the movable body 042SG302R is operated. When the image is displayed on the image display device 5 and both the movable body 042SG302L and the movable body 042SG302R are operated, an effect is executed in which both the image 042SG5x and the image 042SG5y are displayed on the image display device 5. However, the notification effect is, for example, an effect of notifying that it develops to a specific reach effect during variable display, or a notification that the jackpot game state is controlled to a promiscuous state after the jackpot game ends. It may be executed as an effect or the like.

  Further, as the notification effect, a mode in which images 042SG5x and 042SG5y in the same mode as the character displayed on the movable body 042SG302L and the character displayed on the movable body 042SG302R is displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 as the notification effect is an image that can be recognized by the player as being an image corresponding to the movable body in operation. An aspect is not ask | required.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-12, in the notification effect, since the movable body 042SG302L and 042SG302R move to the effect position, the movable body 042SG401 falls in front of the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R, so the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R. Since the player can be focused on the movable body 042SG401 while attracting the attention of the player, the effect of the movable body 042SG401 can be enhanced.

  In the feature unit 042SG, as the notification effect, the movable body 042SG302L and 042SG302R are illustrated as dropping the movable body 042SG401 after moving to the effect position. However, the present invention is not limited to this and is movable. The drop of the body 042SG401 may be executed during the movement of the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R to the effect position or before the movable bodies 042SG302L and 042SG302R start moving to the effect position.

  In addition, in this feature part 042SG, the movable body 042SG511 is illustrated as an interlocking production in which the movable body 042SG511 is dropped from the standby position of the movable body 042SG511 to the production position, but the movable body 042SG511 after the fall is movable by the player during the reach production. You may make it return to a standby position again at the timing which is hard to pay attention to the body 042SG511. Further, the movable body 042SG511 after dropping may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the process in which the movable body 042SG511 returns to the standby position by turning off light emitting means such as LEDs around the movable body 042SG511.

  Furthermore, the process of returning the movable body 042SG511 to the standby position by the moved or rotated image display device 5 may be concealed from the player by providing the image display device 5 so as to be movable or rotatable in the vertical direction.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 005SG. In other words, conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have movable bodies that can be operated. However, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-194091, there is a problem that the effect of producing the movable body is insufficient because the movable body only moves toward the display area of the display means. Therefore, as an invention 005SG that solves the problem when focusing on the problem,
An operable movable body (for example, the first movable body 005SG300 shown in FIG. 10-1 of the characteristic portion 005SG),
The movable body operates toward the display area of the display means, and a movable body effect can be executed by displaying a specific image corresponding to the movable body on the display means (for example, in the characteristic portion 005SG). The effect control CPU 120 moves the first movable portion 005SG301A of the first movable body 005SG301 toward the display area 5E and causes the image display device 5 to change the contracted mode in the first movable body presentation. The part which displays the blade edge | tip image 005SG002 corresponding to 2nd movable part 005SG301B which can recognize a normal aspect (refer FIG. 10-15)
According to this feature, a specific image corresponding to the movable body is displayed when the movable body moves from the front of the display means toward the display area. The effect of the movable body effect can be enhanced.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 177SG. That is, conventionally, there is a display device that is movably provided with an EL display that is operated by a player's operation (operation). However, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-20041 has a problem that the presentation effect cannot be improved because the EL display simply moves by the player's operation. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as means of the invention 177SG to solve the problem,
Detection means (for example, stick controller 31A and push button 31B) capable of detecting the player's movement;
Based on the detection means detecting the movement of the player over a predetermined period during an effective period (for example, an operation reception period of the push button 31B), the first movable body and the second movable body are Specific effect execution means (for example, an effect in the feature portion 177SG) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, the movable body effect shown in FIGS. 10-30 and 10-31 in the feature portion 177SG) operated in conjunction with the player's action. The control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG.
With
The specific effect executing means is
When the player's movement is detected by the detection means in the first situation, the first movable body and the second movable body are operated in the first movement mode (for example, the characteristic portion As shown in FIG. 10-28 of 177SG, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are arranged at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are driven in the speed priority mode. The movable body 177SG302L, 177SG302R is operated at high speed and low torque)
When the player's movement is detected by the detection means in a second situation different from the first situation, the first movable body and the second movable body are changed to the second movement mode. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-28 of the characteristic part 177SG, when the push button 31B is operated in a state where the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R are not arranged at the origin position, the moving motors 177SG391L and 177SG391R are operated. To drive the movable bodies 177SG302L and 177SG302R at a low speed by driving in the torque priority mode)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to improve the production effect.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 005SG. That is, there is a conventional telop image that can be scroll-displayed on the display means. However, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-70743 has a problem that it is not possible to enhance the effect. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as invention 38SH to solve the problem,
A predetermined state (for example, a state where a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is being executed or an error is detected. A predetermined gaming state (low probability low base state (normal state), low probability high base state ( (Short-time state), high-probability low base state (latent state), high-probability high base state (probability change state)), or a state controlled to a specific performance mode)) For example, a part of the effect control CPU 120 that controls to execute the super reach effect by executing step S172, or a part that detects an error in the game control microcomputer 100. A part of the microcomputer 100 that controls to a predetermined gaming state and a part that controls to a predetermined effect mode in the CPU 120 for effect control. And a there may be) a part that executes a predetermined effect,
Special effect execution means that can execute a special effect (for example, a super reach effect) (for example, a portion that executes the super reach effect by performing step S172 in the CPU 120 for effect control),
A display control means (for example, a step of performing the first telop effect by performing step S172 in the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying a related display (for example, telop display) related to the predetermined state on the display means; A portion that performs the second telop effect when receiving a command indicating that an error has been detected in S75),
The display control means includes
During the execution of the special effect, the related display can be displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, a first stage in which characters move at a medium speed) accompanied by an action,
In accordance with a change in the mode of the special effect, the related display mode is changed from the predetermined mode to the special mode having a different operation speed (for example, the second stage in which the character moves at a high speed, the character moves at a low speed) For example, the production control CPU 120 executes step S172, so that the first half of the super reach production (before the cut-in display) is performed at the first stage. 1 telop display 115IW10 is performed, the first telop display 115IW10 is performed at the second stage in the second half of the super reach production (after the cut-in display is performed), and the first telop display 115IW10 is performed at the third stage immediately before the change stop. (Refer to FIG. 8-1 of the characteristic part 38SG))
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the characteristic portion 115SH (FIGS. 8-1 to 8-4), the characteristic portion 005SG (FIGS. 9-1 to 9-4), and the characteristic portion 177SG (FIGS. 10-1 to 10-). 31), the characteristic part 042SG (FIGS. 11-1 to 11-12) is illustrated, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be implemented for a plurality of characteristic parts among these characteristic parts.

  In addition, when implementing about several characteristic parts in the pachinko gaming machine 1, you may use at least 1 movable body in common among the movable bodies which operate | move by each characteristic part, An individual movable body may be used.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Game board 4A 1st special symbol display apparatus 4B 2nd special symbol display apparatus 5 Image display apparatus 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 CPU for effect control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A first movable body operably provided;
A second movable body provided to be operable at a position different from the first movable body;
Display means;
With
The display means includes
A first character and a second character can be displayed;
Displaying the first character when the first movable body is operated;
Displaying the second character when the second movable body is operated;
A gaming machine, wherein the first character and the second character are displayed when the first movable body and the second movable body are operated.

Images